-
Page 1
Emotron TSA Softstarter Instruction manual English Valid from Software version 1.27… -
Page 3
Date of release: 28-01-2017 © Copyright CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB 2013-2017 CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB retains the right to change specifications and illustrations in the text, without prior notification. The contents of this document may not be copied without the explicit… -
Page 5: Safety Instructions
Safety instructions Phase compensation capacitor Congratulations for choosing a product from CG Drives & Automation! If a phase compensation capacitor is to be used, it must be Before you begin with the installation, commissioning or connected at the inlet of the softstarter, not between the powering up the unit for the first time it is very important motor and the softstarter.
-
Page 6
CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 7: Table Of Contents
4.4.13 Other control voltage ……….37 8.1.1 1st Line [110]…………69 8.1.2 2nd Line [120] …………69 Getting started……….39 Main Setup [200]………… 69 Check list …………..39 8.2.1 Operation setup [210] ……….69 Mains and motor connection ……… 39 CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 8
Process value …………140 Description of the EInt formats ……141 Softstarter theory ……..143 10.1 Background theory……….143 10.2 Reduced voltage starting……..145 10.3 Other starting methods……… 147 10.4 Use of softstarters with torque control ….148 CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 9: Introduction
The Quick Start Guide can be put in a cabinet so that it is always easy to access in case of an emergency. — =Standard (Grounded Supply type net) I=IT-net (EMC not fulfilled) Brand label A=Standard Software A=Standard software — =CE approved Standard U=UL/cUL approved CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Introduction…
-
Page 10: Standards
The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources. For more detailed information about recycling this product, please contact the local distributor of the product. Introduction CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 11: Glossary
——————————————— — lb ft UInt Communication format (Unsigned Integer) n mot Communication format (Integer) Long Communication format (Integer Long) SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage The function cannot be changed in run mode CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Introduction…
-
Page 12
Introduction CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 13: Mounting
Minimum free space WARNING! Never operate the softstarter with the front Minimum free space cover removed. mm (in) Frame size above* below at side (3.9) (3.9) *) Above: Cabinet roof to softstarter or softstarter to softstarter CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Mounting…
-
Page 14: Mechanical Specifications And Drawings
H3 = Total height including Cable covers. Emotron TSA frame size 1 — 2 Fig. 3 Dimensions for Emotron TSA frame size 1 and 2, bottom view. Fig. 2 Dimensions for Emotron TSA frame size 1 and 2. Mounting CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 15
Emotron TSA frame size 3 196 (7.7) 235 (9.3) Fig. 4 Dimensions for Emotron TSA frame size 3. Fig. 5 Dimensions for Emotron TSA frame size 3, bottom view. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Mounting… -
Page 16
Emotron TSA frame size 4 254 (10) 260 (10.3) Fig. 6 Dimensions for Emotron TSA frame size 4 . Fig. 7 Dimensions for Emotron TSA frame size 4, bottom view. Mounting CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 17: Mounting Schemes
On our websites www.cgglobal.com and www.emotron.com Ø 13 it is possible to download a full-size template for positioning of the fixing holes. Ø 7 (x 4) Fig. 9 Hole pattern for Emotron TSA frame size 3. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Mounting…
-
Page 18
Mounting CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 19: Connections
Fig. 11 Mains, motor and control supply voltage connection NOTE: The Emotron TSA control-board is equipped with a ground plane to which shielded cables can be connected (see Fig. 17 on page 21). NOTE: For UL-approval use 75°C copper wire only. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Connections…
-
Page 20
Full voltage can be detected if no motor is connected. Table 7 Tightening torque for bolts [Nm (Lb-in)]. Tightening torque for bolts [Nm (Lb-in)] Frame size Motor or mains PE cable cables 8 (70) 5 (44) 8 (70) 5(44) Connections CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 21
Full voltage can be detected if no motor is connected. Table 8 Tightening torque for bolts [Nm (Lb-in)]. Tightening torque for bolts [Nm (Lb-in)] Frame size Motor or mains PE cable cables 20 (177) 12 (106) CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Connections… -
Page 22
Full voltage can be detected if no motor is connected. Table 9 Tightening torque for bolts [[Nm (Lb-in)]. Tightening torque for bolts [Nm (Lb-in)] Frame size Motor or mains PE cable cables 50 (442) 12 (106) Connections CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 23: Busbar Distances On Emotron Tsa Softatarter
44 (0.9) 83 (3.27) 83 (3.27) 3.1.2 Cable covers When the Mains and motor cables are connected, mount the cable covers according to Fig. 16. Fig. 16 How to mount the cable covers general drawing. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Connections…
-
Page 24: Board Layout And Connectors
WARNING! For softstarters rated higher than 525 VAC, it is mandatory to have at least basic insulation from the temperature sensor towards live voltage. Connections CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 25
Solid: 2.5 (27) 8. Terminals for DigIn/AnIn/AnOut signals (control board) * When using Ferrules, suitable Ferrule length is 10-12 mm/ 0.39 — 0.47 in. 9. Terminals for relay output signals and PTC connection (power board) CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Connections… -
Page 26: Control Signal Connections
Analogue output. Factory setting is “Current”. 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA; max load impedance 500 Ω +24 VDC ±5%. Max. current from +24 VDC = 50 mA. Control signal supply 2, voltage to digital input. Short circuit-proof and overload-proof. Connections CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 27: Wiring Examples
• If required, connect relay R1 (terminals 21 and 22) to the contactor – the softstarter then controls the mains contactor (for factory configuration of R1 see menu [551]). Always ensure the installation complies with the appropriate local regulations. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Connections…
-
Page 28
Relay 2 Relay 3 Run FWD Stop DigIn 1 DigIn 2 +10 V AnIn DigIn 3 DigIn 4 +24 V AnOut +24 V Fig. 20 Separate Start- Stop-signals ( 3-wire connection) wir- ing example. Connections CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 29
Relay 2 Relay 3 Stop Run FWD DigIn 1 DigIn 2 +10 V AnIn DigIn 3 DigIn 4 +24 V AnOut +24 V Fig. 21 Common Start- Stop-signals ( 2-wire connection) wir- ing example. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Connections… -
Page 30
Relay 2 Relay 3 Run FWD DigIn 1 DigIn 2 +10 V AnIn DigIn 3 DigIn 4 +24 V AnOut +24 V Fig. 22 Common Start- Stop-signals ( 2-wire connection) wir- ing example, Level control. Connections CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 31
+24 V Reset Run FWD Pressure 0 — 10 bar Current 0 — I 4 — 20 mA 4 — 20 mA Fig. 23 Extended wiring example, using digital and analogue inputs and outputs. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Connections… -
Page 32
Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 DigIn 1 DigIn 2 +10 V AnIn DigIn 3 DigIn 4 +24 V AnOut +24 V Run FWD Stop Fig. 24 Reverse current brake wiring example. Connections CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 33
Relay 2 OperationREV avoided. Relay 1 Relay 2 DigIn 1 DigIn 2 +10 V AnIn DigIn 3 DigIn 4 +24 V AnOut +24 V Run FWD Stop Run REV Fig. 25 Connection for start forward/reverse. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Connections… -
Page 34
If both DigIn 1 “RunFWD” and DigIn 3 “RunREV” are closed at the same time, a stop is performed according to the stop settings in menu group [340]. In this case no start will be allowed. Connections CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 35: Application Guidelines
70 A with a start current ratio of 3.0 x FLC (210 A) for 30 seconds, and with a 330 seconds (5.5 minutes) interval between starts (current via bypass contactors). CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Application guidelines…
-
Page 36
Bandsaw Chipper Circular saw Lumber & Wood Debarker Planer Sander Ball mill Centrifuge Petrochemical Extruder Screw conveyor Ball mill Grinder Material conveyor Palletiser Transport & Machine Press Roller mill Rotary table Trolley Escalator Application guidelines CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 37: The Application Functions List
This column guides you to the menu, menu group, or manual section where you find a description of the settings for the function. For instance «331=Sqr Torq Ctr», means: set menu [331] to “Sqr Torq Ctr.” CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Application guidelines…
-
Page 38
344=Rev Curr Brk Conveyor speed set from planer shaft High speed lines power analogue output. Worn out tool Use load monitor maximum alarm Broken coupling Use load monitor minimum alarm Application guidelines CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 39
Torque boost in beginning of ramp. Jamming Use load monitor maximum alarm HAMMER MILL Reverse current brake with reversing 341=Brake Fast stop contactor for heavy loads. 344=Rev Curr Brk Motor blocked Locked rotor function CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Application guidelines… -
Page 40: Special Conditions
For instance, the start ramp can only be set for an average starting ramp for all the connected motors. This means that the start time may differ from motor to motor. Similarly, the load monitor alarm levels/margins are applied for the Application guidelines CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 41: Earthing System
Emotron TSA should be configured for IT-net supply type. The unit will then not fulfil the EMC requirements. If you have a softstarter without IT net supply type, the softstarter can be rebuilt. Contact your local CG Drives & Automation service partner. 4.4.12 Earth fault relay It is possible to use an earth fault relay to protect motor and cables.
-
Page 42
Application guidelines CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 43: Getting Started
73). • Check / Set real time clock (menu [740], section 8.7.4, page 134) • Select keyboard control (menu [2151], section 7.1.1, page 49). • Perform a test run from the control panel. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Getting started…
-
Page 44: Default Toggle Loop
Chapter 6. page 43. Menu [100], “Preferred View” is displayed at start. 1. Press to display menu [211] “Language”. NQE1 Select Language using the keys. Confirm with Getting started CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 45: Control Panel Operation
To stop the motor, press the key on the control panel. NOTE: For selection of other stop method than the default “Coast”, see section 7.1.2, page 35 and menu [341]. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Getting started…
-
Page 46
Getting started CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 47: Operation Via The Control Panel
Shows the setting or selection in the active Area F: menu (empty at 1st level and 2nd level menus). Shows warnings and alarm messages. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Operation via the control panel…
-
Page 48: Led Indicators
Table 18 Control key commands. Start with reversed (left) rotation. START REVERSE RUN (Requires reversing contactor). Stop motor. STOP/RESET Reset softstarter (after a trip). Start with forward START FORWARD RUN (right) rotation. Operation via the control panel CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 49: Function Keys
To activate the jog key function, see instructions in “Jog functions” on page 50. To deactivate the jog key function, unlock the keyboard in menu [218]. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Operation via the control panel…
-
Page 50: Toggle And Loc/Rem Key
1. Press the Toggle key and keep it pressed while pressing the ESC key. 2. The message “Clear Loop?” is shown. 3. Confirm with ENTER to delete the menus in the loop. Operation via the control panel CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 51: Loc/Rem Function
Relays [550]. When the softstarter is set to “LOCAL”, the signal on the relay will be active/high. In “REMOTE” the signal will be inactive/low. 3rd level 4th level Fig. 33 Menu structure CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Operation via the control panel…
-
Page 52: The Main Menu
View Trip Log Here you can see the last 9 trips in the trip memory. System Data This menu contains information on softstarter model and software version. Operation via the control panel CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 53: Main Features
[520], see section 8.5.2, page 108. Spinbrake can only be activated when the TSA is non-operational, i.e that Stp is shown in the display. Fig. 35 Run/Stop decision tree CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Main features…
-
Page 54: Jog Functions
Jog speed level in menu “[353] Jog Ramp Rate” to achieve smooth Jog start. There are also a couple of examples on how to apply time settings for jog by using logic functions, see page 63. Main features CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 55: Working With Parameter Sets
DigIn running in automatic control mode (i.e. control signals from 3 [523] is set to “Set Ctrl 1” and DigIn 4 [524] is set to “Set PLC, e.g. via fieldbus). Ctrl 2”. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Main features…
-
Page 56: Configuration Of Parameter Sets
2. Select motor M1 in menu [212]. 3. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters. 4. Select parameter set B in menu [241]. 5. Select M2 in menu [212]. 6. Enter motor data and settings for other parameters. Main features CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 57
1 to the internal control board of TSA unit 2, using menu [245]. Fig. 38 Copy and load parameters between two Emotron TSA units via the control panel. WARNING! Switch off all power connections before opening the front cover. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Main features… -
Page 58
Fig. 39 Copy and load parameters between two Emotron TSA units using an external control panel (optional). NOTE: Another solution for copying settings and data between different softstarter units is via PC, using the EmoSoftCom PC tool (option). See section 12.2, page 155. Main features CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 59: Applying Limitations, Alarms And Autoreset
• The Trip LED indicator (red triangle) is lit. • The “TRP” status indication is displayed (area D of the display). • The Trip relay or output is active (if selected function in menu [551], [552] or [553]). CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Main features…
-
Page 60: Load Monitor Function
[223] (being 100%). However, the way to set the levels differs between the two methods: NOTE: When using the load monitor, check that the nominal motor power is set properly in menu [223]. Main features CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 61
(menu [223]). The actual shaft 4112 MaxAlarmLev power is displayed in brackets together with the Alarm Level (104%) 116% value to facilitate setting. See example on the right. Fig. 40 Manually set load monitor alarm levels. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Main features… -
Page 62
Every time a new “Autoset Alarm” command is executed, the actual shaft power value will be updated as the “Normal Load” value, with the alarm levels following this. Fig. 41 Autoset load monitor alarm margins. Main features CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 63
C. The maximum alarm level is exceeded. D. When the set maximum alarm delay time (3 seconds) has passed, the set maximum alarm action is executed, in this case a Hard trip, as set in menu [4111]. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Main features… -
Page 64: Reset And Autoreset
“Autoreset Attempts [251]” on page 83. activated by selecting one of the keyboard alternatives (enabled as default). If controlled by digital input [520], or by virtual I/O [560], this is set by selecting “Reset” signal. Main features CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 65: Programmable I/O
• No digital outputs are available. • 3 relays [550], with the possibility for up to 6 extra relays if extended I/O option boards (max 2) are fitted. • There are also 8 virtual I/Os [560] CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Main features…
-
Page 66: Enable And Stop Functions
Fig. 44, page 61. Fig. 45 gives an example of a possible RunFWD and RunREV inputs are active, then the sequence. softstarter stops according to the selected stop method in menu [341]. Fig. 46 gives an example of a possible sequence. Main features CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 67: Logical Functions
WARNING! Fig. 46 Input and output status for level control Motor may start instantly! Please verify that parameter settings and I/O connections are according to desired function before switching on mains supply. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Main features…
-
Page 68
Number of pulses with Jog speed before run 6521 C2 trig DigIn 2 Pulse input 6522 C2 Reset Counter 2 is blocked until end of deceleration. 6523 C2 Trip Val Number of pulses with Jog speed after run Main features CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 69
Reset Flip Flop 1 and stop the motor 6323 Timer2 Dly 5,0 s Jog time before stop 6411 F1 mode Edge 6412 F1 set Negative flank of “Dec” 6413 F1 reset Reset when “Jog speed after run” has ended CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Main features… -
Page 70
Main features CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 71: Functionality
Emotron TSA model, software and hardware version. Service System data 8.9, page 136 information. WARNING! Motor may start instantly! Please verify that parameter settings and I/O connections are according to desired function before switching on mains supply. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 72
For bus communication, the integer value 0 is used to select “Off ” in the example. Integer 1 represents “REV”. To change selection by bus communication refer to the description in Chapter 9. page 139. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 73: Preferred View [100]
Sets the content of the lower row in the menu [100] “Preferred View”. Same selection as in menu [110]. Default: 120 2nd Line Motor Data [220] is connected to Current selected motor. Default: Current CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 74
Jog command via digital input or Virtual I/O. Int+Ext Jog command via internal or external keyb control panel. Jog command via serial communication. Int keyb Jog command via internal control panel. Ext keyb Jog command via external control panel. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 75
Local start/stop command via serial keyboard and the keys are activated. (it is possible to select communication. e.g. Start REV to be Off or REV in menu [2175] above). 218 Lock Code? Default: Range: 0–9999 CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 76: Remote Signal Level/Edge [21A]
NOTE: Edge controlled inputs can comply with the Machine Directive (see Chapter 1.5.1 page 6) if the inputs are directly used to start and stop the machine. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 77: Motor Data [220]
For explanation of the different abbreviations used in this 1 US-units chapter, see Chapter 1.7.2 page 7 WARNING! When the “Units” setting is changed, this will also affect the factory settings of the motor. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 78
. It must be set within the range 25 — 400% of n_soft the softstarter power Pn_soft. If parallel motors, set the sum 221 Motor Volts of the motor power. See nominal data for CG motors in Ta- 400V ble 27. 400 V for SI-units… -
Page 79
226 Motor Poles Default: Range: 2-144 Nominal Motor Cos φ [227] Set the nominal Motor cosphi (power factor). 227 Motor Cosφ 0.86 0.86 Default: (see Note 2, page 73) Range: 0.50 — 1.00 CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 80: Motor Protection [230]
[2311] is performed. The alarm remains active until the I²t value is below 95% before allowing a reset or an autoreset (see more detailed description in menu [2521]). Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 81
Using motor overload trip class 10 Current: 5 x In_mot Overload trip time (max start time): 20 sec 60 s 20 s Current (x I n_mot 500% x I 300% x I n_mot n_mot Fig. 50 The thermal curve CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 82
PTC Alarm Action [2331] B 120 ° F 140 F Nema 2331 PTC AA ° No action H 165°C Default: No action No action Hard Trip For a definition, see Table 23, page 55. Soft Trip Warning Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 83
Counts down from set value in menu [2343]. 2341 StartLim AA No action 2344 TimTNxtStrt Read only Default: No action No action Unit minutes Hard Trip For a definition, see Table 23, page 55 Resolution: 1 min Warning CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 84: Parameter Set Handling [240]
NOTE: The parameter set cannot be changed No action during run if the parameter set includes change of the motor set (M1-M4). Hard Trip For a definition, see Table 23, page 55. Soft Trip Warning Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 85
NOTE: The control panel will be temporarily locked while copying or loading data to the internal control panel. If the on-board RS-232 port is connected to a PC or to an external control panel this will also be temporarily locked. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 86
Data from motor 4 is loaded. M1M2M3 Data from motor 1, 2, 3 and 4 are loaded. All data is loaded from the control panel. NOTE: Loading or copying will not affect the value in menus for viewing. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 87: Autoreset [250]
• Number of allowed autoreset attempts [2511]= 5. • Within 10 minutes 6 trips occur. 1–3600 1–3600 1–3,600 s • At the 6th trip there is no autoreset, because the autoreset counter allows only 5 attempts to autoreset a trip. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 88
When the delay time has [2541] elapsed, the alarm will be reset. The delay counter starts counting immediately. 2524 LockedRotor 2541 MaxAlarm Default: Default: 1–3600 1–3600 1–3,600 s 1–3600 1–3600 1–3,600 s Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 89
External Alarm 1 autoreset [2549] Default: The delay counter starts counting as soon as the relevant external alarm input is inactive. 1–3600 1–3600 1–3,600 s 2549 Ext Alarm 1 Default: 1–3600 1–3600 1–3,600 s CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 90: Serial Communication [260]
In this menu the delay time for an autoreset of an Fieldbus module. undervoltage alarm [433] is set. The delay time starts counting when the fault is removed. The undervoltage *) EtherCAT and Bluetooth are future options. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 91
Select “RW” in normal Set up the parameters for fieldbus communication. cases to control inverter. 263 Fieldbus Additional Process Values [2634] Define the number of additional process values sent in cyclic messages. 2634 AddPrValues Default: Range: CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 92
Communication Fault Time [2642] Gateway [2654] Defines the delay time for the trip/warning. 2654 Gateway 2642 ComFlt Time 0.000.000.000 0.5s Default: 0.0.0.0 Default: 0.5 s Range: 0.1-15 s DHCP [2655] 2655 DHCP Default: Selection: On/Off Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 93: Process [300]
321 Proc Source Default: No process source selected. F(AnIn) Function of analogue input. F(Bus) Function of communication value. NOTE: If F (Bus) is chosen in menu [321], see section 9.5 Process value, page 140. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 94
Confirm the character by moving the cursor to the next position by pressing the NEXT key. No. for serial No. for serial Character Character comm. comm. ° í Space 0–9 1–10 ñ ó ô ü Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 95: Start Setting [330]
Voltage control is selected when a linear voltage ramp is desired. The thyristor switch on time will be ramped up linearly, from “Initial Voltage”, menu [334], up to full mains voltage. See Fig. 52. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 96
The motor voltage is controlled according torque ramp reactivated. The ramp slope will increase above Voltage Ctr to a linear voltage ramp, menu [334]. Direct online Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 97
As “Voltage ramp with Current limit” but with fixed ramp 336 Start Time time of 6 seconds. Default: 10 s Range: 1 — 60 s Current limit Ramp time (6 seconds) Fig. 55 Direct on-line start in combination with current limit at start. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 98: Stop Setting [340]
Braking may be used in applications where the motor needs to be stopped quickly. When this selection is made, the braking method (“Dynamic Vector Brake” or “Reverse Current Brake”) can be activated in menu [344]. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 99
The DC brake will automatically be deactivated when the Stop time motor has stopped or when the stop time has expired. Time Optionally an external rotation sensor can be connected via Fig. 58 Step down voltage at stop. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 100
The strength of the DC brake is set here, the value expressed Range: 0 – 120s as a percentage of the maximum available DC braking power. 348 DCB Strength Default: 30 % Range: 20 – 80% Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 101: Jog [350]
[rpm] Jog speed t [s] t [s] Jog command Fig. 59 Jog command Jog Speed Forward [351] 351 JogSpd FWD Default: Range: 1- 30% of nominal motor speed [225] CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 102: Load Monitor And Process Protection [400]
Setting of the wanted alarm behaviour when a “Maximum Alarm” has been detected. 4111 MaxAlarmAct No Action Default: No Action No Action Hard Trip For a definition, see Table 23, page 55. Soft Trip Warning Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 103
0.5 s period longer than the set “Max Pre-Alarm Delay” time, the Range: 0.1 — 90 s selected “Maximum Pre-Alarm Action” in menu [4121] is activated. 4123 MaxPreAlDel 0.5s Default: 0.5 s Range: 0.1–90 s CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 104
“Autoset”. See nominal motor power, the alarm delay timer starts counting further information in Fig. 40, page 57. down. 4142 MinAlarmLev shaft Default: Range: 0 — 200% of nominal motor power [223] Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 105
[4142] MinAlarmLev [4174] MinAlarmMar nominal motor power [223]. NOTE: Changing any alarm margin without performing 4172 MaxPreAlMar Autoset will NOT affect the alarm levels. Default: Range: 0 — of nominal motor power [223] CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 106
[417] Autoset. A new autoset command will overwrite previously used alarm levels. Autoset can also be triggered by a remote signal, setting the function of any digital input to “Autoset”. Note that this signal is edge-triggered. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 107: Process Protection [420]
Hard Trip 4223 LockRotCurr For a definition, see Table 23, page 55. 480% Soft Trip Warning Default: 480% (4.8 x I n_mot Range: 100% — 1000% (1.0 x I — 10.0 x I n_mot n_mot CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 108: Mains Protection [430]
Voltage Unbalance Alarm Delay [4313] Default: In this menu the response delay for the voltage unbalance Range: 1 — 90 s alarm, as set in [4311] and [4312], is selected. 4313 VoltUnbDel Default: Range: 1 — 90 s Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 109
L123 and L321 Under-Voltage Alarm Delay [4333] In this menu the response delay for the voltage unbalance alarm, as set in [4431] and [4432], is selected 4333 UnderV Del Default: Range: 1 — 90 s CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 110: I/O [500]
S1. When the jumper is in voltage mode only the voltage menu items are selectable. With the jumper in Default: Min (0 V/4.00 mA) current mode only the current menu items are 0.00–20.00 mA selectable. Range: 0–10.00 V Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 111
With “AnIn Function Max” the physical maximum value is scaled to selected process unit. The default scaling is dependent of the selected function of AnIn [511]. 5136 AnIn FcMax Default: Min value Max value User-defined 2 Define user value in menu [5137] CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 112: Digital Inputs [520]
Activates other parameter set. See Table Set Ctrl 1 29 for selection possibilities. Activates other parameter set. See Table Set Ctrl 2 29 for selection possibilities. Loc/Rem 10 Activates local mode defined in [2173]. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 113: Analogue Output [530]
AnIn Mirror of received signal value on AnIn. Line Voltage 14 Mains supply NOTE: To activate the parameter set selection, menu 241 must be set to DigIn. Used Th Cap 15 Used thermal capacity CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 114
[531]. Table 30 AnOut Min Value Max Value Function Process Value Process Min [324] Process Max [325] Shaft Power Motor Power [223] Current Motor Current [224] Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 115
Min value Max value User defined 2 Define user value in menu [5337 ] NOTE: It is possible to set AnOut up as an inverted output signal by setting “AnOut Min” > “AnOut Max”. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 116: Relays [550]
Max pre-alarm condition active (trip or Flip-flop output 4. Max PreAlarm warning). Flip-flop output 4 inverted. Min alarm condition active (trip or Min Alarm CTR1 Counter output 1. warning). !CTR1 Counter output 1 inverted. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 117
Fig. 63 Relay function example for start and braking cycle. is active (trip) PTC Alarm 103 PTC alarm active (trip or warning) PT100 Alarm 104 PT100 alarm active (trip or warning) 105 I t alarm active (trip or warning) CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 118
I/O option board on the option mounting plate. The functions and selections are the same as for “Relay 1” [551]. Default settings are “Off ”. NOTE: Visible only if optional board is detected or if any input/output is activated. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 119: Virtual I/Os [560]
“OR logic”. See section 8.5.2, page 108 (Digital Input) for descriptions of the different selections. 561 VIO 1 Dest Default: Same selections as in menu Digital Input 1 Selection: [521], page 108. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 120: Logical Functions And Timers [600]
CA1 Level LO [6113] Digital Comparator Setup [615] — [618] There are also 4 digital comparators that compare any Fig. 65 Analogue comparator type “Window” available digital signals. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 121
CA1 Value AnIn 6112 CA1 Level HI 60% (12 mA/20 mA x 100%) 6113 CA1 Level LO 40% (8 mA/20 mA x 100%) 6114 CA1 Type Hysteresis VIO 1 Dest Run FWD VIO 1 Source CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 122
The reference signal passes the Level LO Hysteresis/ value from above (negative edge), the window band 40°C comparator CA1 is reset, output is set low. CA1 Level LO CA1 output Hysteresis High Window High Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 123
The reference signal passes the Level LO value from above (signal outside Window band), the comparator CA1 is reset, output is set low. Set delay Reset delay Fig. 68 Set/reset delay of output signal. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 124
“Trip”, and for CD4 [6181] the default is “Ready”. Operation Default: Operation Same selection as in menu Relay 1 Selection: [551], page 112. Input signal for CD1 [6151] Digital comparator 1 Fig. 69 Digital comparator. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 125: Logic Outputs [620]
Default: ((1.2).3).4 ((1&1)+1)&0 Default execution order, see which is equal to 0. ((1.2).3).4 explanation below. With the alternative execution order for the L1 Expression Alternative execution order, see (1.2).(3.4) explanation below. this is representing: CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 126
Logic output 1 inverted. +=OR Not used for Logic 1. ^=EXOR Logic output 2. Not used for Logic 2. Logic output 2 inverted. Not used for Logic 2. Logic output 3. Not used for Logic 3. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 127
The reset of the output signal for the Logic 1 function is delayed with the set value in this menu. Compare to Fig. 68, page 119. 621A L1 Res Dly 0:00:00.0 Default: 0:00:00.0 (hours:minutes:seconds) Range: 0:00:00.0–9:59:59.9 CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 128: Timers [630]
The function of the “On-time” mode is to extend an Prolongs the activation of the output On-time activated (high) timer output signal in comparison to the signal according to menu [6314]. trigger signal. See Fig. 72. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 129: Sr Flip-Flops [640]
RESET This menu shows the actual value of the timer. 6316 Timer1 Val Read-only 0:00:00.0 Fig. 73 Programmable flip-flop modes. Timer 2 — 4 [632] — [634] Refer to the descriptions for Timer 1. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 130
Table 35 Truth table for Edge control without priority 6414 F1 Set Dly 0:00:00.0 RESET Default: 0:00:00.0 (hours:minutes:seconds) — (no change) Range: 0:00:00.0–9:59:59.9 1 (set) 0 (reset) No change Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 131: Counters [650]
Counter 1 is incremented by 1 on every positive edge of the trigger signal. NOTE: Maximum counting frequency is 8 Hz. 6511 C1 Trig Default: Same selections as in menu Relay 1 [551], Selection: page 112. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 132: Clock Logic [660]
Date when the clock output signal (CLK1) is deactivated. Note that if “Clk1DateOff ” is set to an earlier date than “Clk1DateOn”, the result will be that the clock is not deactivated at the set date. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 133: Operation/Status [700]
6615 Clk1Weekday — — — — — SS VIO 1 Dest Run FWD 716 Shaft Power Read-only VIO 1 Source Clk1 Clock 2 [662] Unit: Resolution: Refer to the description for Clock 1 [661]. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 134
3. See menu PT100 Inputs [2323], page 78. Used Thermal Capacity [71K] 71B PT100B1 123 This menu displays the used thermal capacity. Read-only Unit: °C 71K Used Th Cap Read-only Resolution: 1°C Unit: Resolution: Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 135: Status [720]
4 — 2 1=Thyristor driven motor 2=Bypass driven motor Source of Run/Stop command, where: 0=Rem, 1=Keyboard (internal + external), 2=Com, 7 — 5 3=Spare, 4=VIO, 5=Internal keyboard, 6=External keyboard. 15 — 8 Reserved for future use. CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 136
Fig. 78 indicates that AnIn is active and has a 65% input Volt Unbal (voltage unbalance) value. NOTE: The shown percentage is an absolute value based on the maximum value of the in- or output; so related to either to 10 V or 20 mA. Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 137
This menu indicates the active digital comparators (CD1 — CD4). 72B CD1-4 Read-only 0000 Logic function status 1 — 4 [72C] This menu indicates the active logic outputs (L1 — L4). 72C Logic 1-4 Read-only 0000 CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 138: Stored Values [730]
00: 00: 00–262143: 59: 59 Energy [733] This menu displays the total energy consumption since the last energy reset [7331] took place. 733 Energy Read-only Unit: Wh (shows Wh, kWh, MWh or GWh) Range: 0 Wh–999,999 GWh Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 139: View Trip Log [800]
Analogue comparator 1 — 4 132 (menu [722]). 812A Digital comparator 1 — 4 812B Logic function status 1-4 812C Timer status 1-4 812D Flip-flop status 1-4 812E Counter status 1-2 812F Time to next start CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality…
-
Page 140: Trip Messages [820] — [890]
0: V, release version 15–14 1: P, pre-release version β , Beta version α , Alpha version Table 39 Information for Modbus and Profibus number, option version Example Description 7–0 Minor option version 15–8 Major option version Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 141
12 characters. Press the + / — keys to enter graphic symbols from the same list as for User-defined Unit [323], page 90. See also «Editing parameter values», page 45. 923 Unit Name Default: No characters shown CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2 Functionality… -
Page 142
Functionality CG Drives & Automation, 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 143: Serial Communication
The on-board RS232 connection is not galvanically option boards. isolated. Modbus RTU The RS485 and USB option boards from CG Drives & Automation are galvanically isolated. There is an asynchronous unisolated RS232 serial communication interface on top of the Emotron TSA unit.
-
Page 144: Motor Data
Requires that menu [2151] Run/Stop Control is set to “Com”. Modbus/DeviceNet Function Instance number 42901 Reset Run, active together with either 42902 Run FWD or Run REV to perform start. (1=Run, 0=Stop) 42903 Run FWD (1=Active) 42904 Run REV (1=Active) Serial communication CG Drives & Automation 0-5980-01r2…
-
Page 145: Description Of The Eint Formats
4-bit signed exponent. Gives a value range: -8..+7 (binary 1000 .. 0111) Where bit 15 indicates that we are using the fixed point m10-m0 11-bit signed mantissa. Gives a format (F=0). value range: -1024..+1023 (binary 10000000000..01111111111) CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Serial communication…
-
Page 146
// make signed Rreturn (*(unsigned short int *)&etmp); //————————————————————————— float eint16_to_float(unsigned short int value) float f; eint16 evalue; evalue=*(eint16 *)&value; if (evalue.f) if (evalue.e>=0) f=(int)evalue.m*pow10(evalue.e); else f=(int)evalue.m/pow10(abs(evalue.e)); else f=value; return f; //————————————————————————— Serial communication CG Drives & Automation 0-5980-01r2… -
Page 147: Softstarter Theory
The dashed line indicates the nominal motors’ torque characteristic is added to the diagram. values. Torque Torque Fig. 85 Typical load torque characteristics Fig. 83 Typical torque characteristics for the DOL start CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Softstarter theory…
-
Page 148
This means when the motor current is decreased by a factor of two by means of reducing the supply voltage, the torque delivered by the motor will be decreased by a factor of four (approximately). Softstarter theory CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 149: Reduced Voltage Starting
On the other hand for low load applications further savings of starting current are impossible even though a big torque reserve is available. Moreover, the resulting abrupt rise of torque first at start and CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Softstarter theory…
-
Page 150
This means, the lowest possible starting current is determined by the combination of motor and load characteristics. Softstarter theory CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 151: Other Starting Methods
However, it is always possible to use a frequency inverter instead. The following illustration shows how the torque and current characteristics are affected when the stator frequency is changed. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Softstarter theory…
-
Page 152: Use Of Softstarters With Torque Control
(linear, square or constant load, need of initial release torque) must be known. In this case a proper torque control method (linear or square) can be chosen and torque boost can be enabled if needed. Softstarter theory CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 153: Troubleshooting, Diagnoses And Maintenance
For more information on maintenance, please contact your this instruction manual, it is absolutely necessary to CG Drives & Automation service partner. read and follow the safety instructions in the manual. Precautions to take with a connected motor…
-
Page 154: Troubleshooting List
Change the Motor I t Current setting in menu [2312]. (Area D: I Soft trip to the prog-rammed I t settings. Check setting of menu [228] Motor Vent, which affects I Warning behaviour. Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 155
Mains voltage dip due to starting Soft trip limits set in menu group [433]. other major power consuming Warning Use other mains supply lines if dip is caused by other machines on the same line. machinery. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance… -
Page 156
Possible cause Remedy /Menu (and indicator) No action Hard trip Check 3-phase mains supply. Volt unbalance 4311 Mains supply voltage unbalance. Soft trip Check settings in menu [4312] and [4313]. Warning Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 157
The alarm can only be reset if the The alarm can not alarm condition is removed. be reset. E.g. PTC, PT100 or over temperature alarm can only be reset after the temperature is decreased. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance… -
Page 158
Troubleshooting, Diagnoses and Maintenance CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 159: Options
PC for backup and printing. options are described in a separate manual. Recording can be made in oscilloscope mode. Please contact CG Drives & Automation sales for further information. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Options…
-
Page 160
Options CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 161: Technical Data
Heavy duty: Start current = 5 x I , Start time = 15 s (Size 1) or 30 s (Size 2- 4), 10 starts/hour. n_soft Fuse data for Semi-conductor fuses, see Table 48. H1=Height of enclosure, H2= Total height. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Technical data…
-
Page 162
Heavy duty: Start current = 5 x I , Start time = 15 s (Size 1) or 30 s (Size 2-4), 10 starts/hour. n_soft Fuse data for Semi-conductor fuses, see Table 48. H1=Height of enclosure, H2= Total height. Technical data CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 163
Heavy duty: Start current = 5 x I , Start time = 15 s (Size 1) or 30 s (Size 2-4), 10 starts/hour. n_soft Fuse data for Semi-conductor fuses, see Table 48. H1=Height of enclosure, H2= Total height. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Technical data… -
Page 164: General Electrical Specifications
42 000 -085 55 000 -100 99 000 -140 160 000 -170 222 000 -200 332 000 -240 433 000 -300 1000 950 000 -360 1200 1 470 000 -450 1400 1 890 000 Technical data CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 165: Environmental Conditions
85 A nominal current: 85 A — (20% x 85 A) = 68 A, which is lower than the required 70 A. An even higher rated model is checked, TSA52-100, rated for 100 A nominal current: CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Technical data…
-
Page 166: Derating At High Altitude
56 A — (11% x 56 A) = 49.8 A, which is well above the required 42 A, and therefore TSA52-056 could be selected in this case. Technical data CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 167: Control Power- And I/O Signal Connectors
24 VDC or max 250 VAC) must be used for all three output relays (terminals 21-33). Do not mix AC and DC voltage. Make sure to use the same voltage level within this terminal section, otherwise the softstarter may be damaged. CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2 Technical data…
-
Page 168
Technical data CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 169: Index
LOC/REM key ……. 46 Emergency ………1 Clock settings ……..134 Local control ……..71 EN60204-1 ……..6 Coast ……….94 Logic ……..116, 121 EN61800-3 ……..6 Com Type ……..86 Status ……..133 EN61800-5-1 ……..6 Comparator Low Voltage Directive ……. 6 CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2…
-
Page 170
Phase compensation capacitor ….1 Status ……….131 Phase loss ………79 Status indications ……43 Phase reversal ………105 Step-up transformer for high Phase sequence …….105, 130 voltage motor ……..36 Planer ……….34 Stop command …….108 Power- and signal connectors ..163 CG Drives & Automation 01-5980-01r2… -
Page 171: Appendix 1: Menu List
Appendix 1: Menu List This is a list of the Emotron TSA menu parameters and their factory settings, along with communication settings for the most important bus formats. Complete lists with communication data and parameter set information could be downloaded from www. cgglobal.com or www.emotron.com. Customer settings Modbus Inst.
-
Page 172
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format Motor Power [Motor] W 43043 Long, 1=1W EInt Motor Curr [Motor] A 43044 Long, 1=0.1A EInt Motor Speed [Motor] rpm 43045 UInt, 1=1rpm UInt Motor Poles [Motor] 43046 Long, 1=1… -
Page 173
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format Copy Set A>B 43021 UInt UInt Default>Set 43023 UInt UInt Copy to CP No Copy 43024 UInt UInt Load from CP No Copy 43025 UInt UInt Autoreset page 83… -
Page 174
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 2563 OverVolt 43077 Long, 1=1s EInt 2564 Undervolt 43088 Long, 1=1s EInt Serial Com page 86 Com Type RS232 43031 UInt UInt Modbus RTU 2621 Baudrate 9600 43032 UInt… -
Page 175
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 2653 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 42711 UInt, 1=1 UInt 0.0.0.0 42712 UInt, 1=1 UInt 0.0.0.0 42713 UInt, 1=1 UInt 0.0.0.0 42714 UInt, 1=1 UInt 2654 Gateway 0.0.0.0 42715 UInt, 1=1… -
Page 176
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format FB Status page 89 2691 Board Type 31081 UInt, 1=1 UInt 2692 SUP-bit 31082 UInt, 1=1 UInt 2693 State FB 31083 UInt, 1=1 UInt 2694 Serial Nbr 31084 UInt, 1=1 UInt… -
Page 177
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format StartSetting page 91 Start Method Lin Torq Ctr 43701 UInt, 1=1 UInt Init Torque 43702 UInt, 1=1% UInt EndTorqueSt 150% 43703 UInt, 1=1% UInt Init Volt 43704 UInt, 1=1% UInt… -
Page 178
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 4111 MaxAlarmAct No action 43775 UInt UInt 4112 MaxAlarmLev 116% 43776 Long, 1=1% EInt 4113 MaxAlarmDel 0,5s 43330 Long, 1=0.1s EInt MaxPreAlarm page 99 4121 MaxPreAlAct No action 43777 UInt… -
Page 179
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 4221 LockRot AA No action 43362 UInt UInt 4222 LockRotTime 5,0s 43757 UInt, 1=0.1s UInt 4223 LockRotCurr 480% 43759 UInt, 1=1% UInt Mains Prot page 104 Volt Unbal 4311 VoltUnbalAA No action… -
Page 180
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format AnIn Advan 5131 AnIn Min 43203 Long, 1=0.01 EInt 5132 AnIn Max 20mA 43204 Long, 1=0.01 EInt 5134 AnIn FcMin 43206 UInt UInt Long, 1= see 1=0.001, 1rpm, 1%, 1°C, 0.001 5135 AnIn VaMin 43541… -
Page 181
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 5334 AnOutFcMin 43256 UInt UInt Long, 1= see 1W, 0.1Hz, 0.1A, 0.1V, 1rpm, 1% 5335 AnOutVaMin 43545 EInt Notes or 0.001 as set in [322] 5336 AnOutFcMax 43257 UInt… -
Page 182
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format VIO 2 Dest 43283 UInt UInt VIO 2 Source 43284 UInt UInt VIO 3 Dest 43285 UInt UInt VIO 3 Source 43286 UInt UInt VIO 4 Dest 43287 UInt UInt… -
Page 183
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 6117 CA1 Res Dly 00:00:00 43408 UInt, 1=1h UInt 43409 UInt, 1=1m UInt 43410 UInt, 1=0.1s UInt 6118 CA1 Tmr Val 00:00:00 42600 UInt, 1=1h UInt 42601 UInt, 1=1m… -
Page 184
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 1W, 0.1Hz, 0.1A, 0.1V, 1rpm, 1%, Long, 1= see 6133 CA3 LevelLO 43424 EInt 0.1°C, 1kWh, 1h or 0.001 as set Notes in [322] 6134 CA3 Type Hysteresis 43425 UInt… -
Page 185
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 42611 UInt, 1=0.1s UInt CD1 Setup page 120 6151 CD1 Operation 43444 UInt UInt 6152 CD1 Set Dly 00:00:00 43445 UInt, 1=1h UInt 43446 UInt, 1=1m UInt 43447 UInt, 1=0.1s… -
Page 186
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 6173 CD3 Res Dly 00:00:00 43462 UInt, 1=1h UInt 43463 UInt, 1=1m UInt 43464 UInt, 1=0.1s UInt 6174 CD3 Tmr Val 00:00:00 42618 UInt, 1=1h UInt 42619 UInt, 1=1m… -
Page 187
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 6219 L1 Set Dly 00:00:00 43480 UInt, 1=1h UInt 00:00:00 43481 UInt, 1=1m UInt 00:00:00 43482 UInt, 1=0.1s UInt 621A L1 Res Dly 43483 UInt, 1=1h UInt 43484 UInt, 1=1m… -
Page 188
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format Logic 3 page 124 6231 L3 Expr ((1.2).3).4 43780 UInt UInt 6232 L3 Input 1 43781 UInt UInt 6233 L3 Op 1 & 43782 UInt UInt 6234 L3 Input 2 43783… -
Page 189
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 6249 L4 Set Dly 00:00:00 43802 UInt, 1=1h UInt 43803 UInt, 1=1m UInt 43804 UInt, 1=0.1s UInt 624A L4 Res Dly 00:00:00 43805 UInt, 1=1h UInt 43806 UInt, 1=1m… -
Page 190
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 6323 Timer2 Dly 00:00:00 43821 UInt, 1=1h UInt 43822 UInt, 1=1m UInt 43823 UInt, 1=0.1s UInt 6324 Timer2 T1 00:00:00 43824 UInt, 1=1h UInt 43825 UInt, 1=1m UInt 43826… -
Page 191
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format Timer4 page 125 6341 Timer4 Trig 43841 UInt UInt 6342 Timer4 Mode Delay 43842 UInt UInt 6343 Timer4 Dly 00:00:00 43843 UInt, 1=1h UInt 43844 UInt, 1=1m UInt 43845… -
Page 192
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 6416 F1 Tmr Val 00:00:00 42648 UInt, 1=1h UInt 42649 UInt, 1=1m UInt 42650 UInt, 1=0.1s UInt Flip flop 2 page 127 6421 F2 mode Reset 43861 UInt… -
Page 193
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 6436 F3 Tmr Val 00:00:00 42654 UInt, 1=1h UInt 42655 UInt, 1=1m UInt 42656 UInt, 1=0.1s UInt Flip flop 4 page 127 6441 F4 mode Edge 43879 UInt… -
Page 194
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format Clock logic page 128 Clock 1 6611 Clk1TimeON 00:00:00 43600 Long, 1=1h EInt 43601 Long, 1=1m EInt 43602 Long, 1=1s EInt 6612 Clk1TimeOff 00:00:00 43603 Long, 1=1h EInt 43604… -
Page 195
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format Shaft Power 31006 UInt, 1=1% UInt El Power 31007 Long, 1=1W EInt RMS Current 31008 Long, 1=0.1A EInt L main volt 31009 Long, 1=0.1V EInt Heatsnk Tmp 31010 Long, 1=0.1°C EInt… -
Page 196
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format CA1-4 31050 UInt, 1=1 UInt CD1-4 31051 UInt, 1=1 UInt Logic 1-4 31052 UInt, 1=1 UInt Timer 1-4 31053 UInt, 1=1 UInt FlipFlop1-4 31072 UInt, 1=1 UInt Counter 1-2 31073… -
Page 197
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format Long, 1= see 1rpm, 1%, 1°C, 0.001 as set in 8111 Process Val 31102 EInt Notes [322] 8113 Torque 31104 Long, 1=0.1Nm EInt 8114 Torque 31105 Long, 1=1% EInt… -
Page 198
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 8124 AnalogueIn 31129 Long, 1=1% EInt 8125 AnalogueOut 31130 Long, 1=1% EInt 8126 IO StatusB1 31131 UInt, 1=1 UInt 8127 IO StatusB2 31132 UInt, 1=1 UInt 8129 CA1-4 31134… -
Page 199
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format (Trip log list 2) page 136 (Trip log list 3) (Trip log list 4) Same parameters as for menu group 810 (Trip (Trip log list 5) log list 1). -
Page 200
Customer settings Modbus Inst. Fieldbus Modbus Menu Parameters Default settings Notes DeviceNet no. format format 42307 UInt UInt 42308 UInt UInt 42309 UInt UInt 42310 UInt UInt 42311 UInt UInt 42312 UInt UInt… -
Page 201: Appendix 2: Trip Message Communication Data
Appendix 2: Trip message communication data Trip log list 31101-31154 31201-31254 31301-31354 Modbus Instance no/ 31401-31454 DeviceNet no: 31501-31554 31601-31654 31701-31754 31801-31854 31901-31954 Trip log list 121/245-122/43 122/90-122/143 122/190-122/243 123/35-123/88 Profibus slot/index 123/135—123/188 123/235-124/33 124/80-124/133 124/180-124/233 125/25-125/78 Trip log list 1101-1154 1201-1254 1301-1354…
-
Page 204
CG Drives & Automation Sweden AB Mörsaregatan 12 Box 222 25 SE-250 24 Helsingborg Sweden T +46 42 16 99 00 F +46 42 16 99 49 www.emotron.com/www.cgglobal.com…
[POST_VERSION] #DO NOT MOVE OR ALTER THIS LINE# V17.00 P0 E1 W17.00 T1391635708 M17.00 I0 O0
# Post Name : MPFAN.pst
# Product : Mill
# Machine Name : Generic
# Control Name : Fanuc
# Description : Generic 4 Axis Mill Post
# 4-axis/Axis subs. : Yes
# 5-axis : No
# Subprograms : Yes
# Executable : MP 17.0
#
# WARNING: THIS POST IS GENERIC AND IS INTENDED FOR MODIFICATION TO
# THE MACHINE TOOL REQUIREMENTS AND PERSONAL PREFERENCE.
#
# THIS POST REQUIRES A VALID 3 OR 4 AXIS MACHINE DEFINITION.
# YOU WILL RECEIVE AN ERROR MESSAGE IF MORE THAN ONE ROTARY AXIS IS DETECTED IN
# THE ACTIVE AXIS COMBINATION WITH READ_MD SET TO YES.
#
# Associated File List$
#
# Associated File List$
#
#region Revision log
# —————————————————————————
# Revision log:
# —————————————————————————
# CNC 06/09/05 — Initial post setup for Mastercam X
# CNC 10/06/05 — Changed parameter read for min_speed, modified pspindle, pprep$ and pset_mach
# — Modified pset_rot_label to use srot_y for horizontal machines
# — Added call to pset_mach in pq$ to set rotaxtyp$
# CNC 11/18/05 — Added psynclath with call to pset_mach to set rotaxtyp$, removed call from pq$
# CNC 02/03/06 — Added logic for high-speed toolpath tool inspection (see prapidout & plinout)
# CNC 06/26/06 — Initial post setup for Mastercam X2
# CNC 12/15/06 — Modified pset_mach for horizontal rotation when rotating about world Z axis.
# CNC 02/26/07 — Modified pwcs
# CNC 11/02/07 — Added prv_shftdrl$ = zero
# CNC 04/08/08 — X3 release — Removed check for write_ops
# CNC 01/26/09 — Initial post update for Mastercam X4
# CNC 04/15/09 — Added read_md switch to enable or disable setting rotary axis from Machine Definition
# CNC 05/06/09 — Modified pindxcalc to omit ctable check when rotary is not indexer
# CNC 06/09/09 — Updated MD parameters
# CNC 08/31/09 — Added check for read_md in pset_mach
# CNC 02/03/10 — Initial post update for Mastercam X5
# CNC 04/21/10 — Added Toolpath Transform Enhancements
# CNC 08/17/10 — Added fix for canned drill cycle incremental mode code output and Z output in incremental mode
# — Added fix for X coolant output
# — Added fix for MP line break pattern
# — Added fix for stock to leave output in tool table
# — Removed CD_VAR variables
# — Added axis sub direction logic
# CNC 08/23/10 — Added logic to handle axis sub with signed or shortest direction and rotation >= 360 degrees
# CNC 02/17/11 — Added three arctype$ initialization variables that are used for
# full arc and helix arc output, when CD is set to R or signed R
# CNC 05/20/11 — Initial post update for Mastercam X6
# CNC 05/23/11 — Modified pcoutrev to fix potential endless loop when processing axis sub
# CNC 09/01/11 — Modified pcoutrev to fix potential endless loop when processing axis sub for null tool change operation
# CNC 11/21/11 — Modified ptap$ and pmisc2$ logic. Post now uses switch (tap_feedtype) to control
# Feed per Unit (Inch/MM), or Feed per Revolution
# CNC 12/28/11 — Minor spacing change
# CNC 02/21/12 — Added support for CD option ‘Subprograms before / after main program’
# CNC 07/24/12 — X coolant ‘With’ — separated coolant ‘with’ logic from cantext ‘with’ logic to give
# more control over output location of X coolant ‘With’. See pcan1 and pcan1_cool
# CNC 10/16/12 — Initial post update for Mastercam X7
# CNC 04/23/13 — Revised logic for rotary lock / unlock (See use_rot_lock)
# CNC 02/06/14 — Initial post update for Mastercam X8
# CNC 05/09/14 — Added «Convert Rapid To Feed» code
#
#endregion
#region Features, notes
# —————————————————————————
# Features:
# —————————————————————————
# This post supports Generic Fanuc code for 3 and 4 axis milling.
# It is designed to support the features of Mastercam X Mill.
#
# NEW FEATURES FOR X:
# — Sub-program support
# Choose the location of subprogram output using the Control Definition options
# ‘Subprograms after main program’ or ‘Subprograms before main program’
# — Machine definition, control definition and toolpath group parameter read sections added.
# — Post sets rotary «switches» from MD and CD settings. Also sets min/max spindle speed,
# max feed rates and type of feed for rotary motion from MD and CD. Includes option for
# units/min and units/sec for inverse time feed rate.
# — Variable initialization with SET_BY_MD or SET_BY_CD are overwritten in this post by parameter or
# variable settings from MD or CD.
# — Support for rotary axis lock/unlock codes when in index mode (see use_rot_lock)
# — Support for signed rotary axis direction and M-code specified axis direction (see use_rotmcode)
# — Switch to force rotary output to index mode when tool plane positioning with a full rotary (see force_index)
# — Enhanced tool information — Added switch for tool comments only, tooltable in header with no tool
# comments at tool change or tooltable in header with tool comments at tool change (see tool_info)
# Tooltable output includes cutter compensation type and stock to leave information
# — Enhanced tool staging options — enable or disable in CD. Set stagetltype in post for output type:
# Do not stage 1st tool, stage 1st tool at last tool change or stage 1st tool at end of file (peof)
# — Supports X comments including machine name, group name and group comment output (see pcomment2)
# — Additional date, time and data path output options (see pheader)
# — Additional rigid tapping cycle (separate from original tapping cycle) and initial custom drill
# cycle support (see pmisc2$ and pdrlcst$)
# — Support for 10 additional canned text options for X
# — Decimal support for sequence number output (set «Increment sequence number» in CD to a decimal value
# for output. I.E. «Increment sequence number» = .5, «Start sequence number» = 10 : N10, N10.5, N11, N11.5, etc…)
# — Switch for output of M00 or M01 at tool change (3 position switch, off, M00, M01 — see prog_stop)
# — Support for seperate XY, XZ and YZ plane/arc variables (see Arc page in CD)
# — Support for X style coolant. Allows up to 10 different coolants to be turned on/off before, with, or after like
# canned text. Coolant output is handled by «coolant» variable and string selector for V9 style coolant,
# «coolantx» variable and string selector for X style coolant.
#
# —————————————————————————
# Misc. Values:
# —————————————————————————
# Integers:
#
# mi1 — Work coordinate system
# 0 = Reference return is generated and G92 with the
# X, Y and Z home positions at file head.
# 1 = Reference return is generated and G92 with the
# X, Y and Z home positions at each tool.
# 2 = WCS of G54, G55…. based on Mastercam settings.
#
# mi2 — Absolute or Incremental positioning at top level
# 0 = absolute
# 1 = incremental
#
# mi3 — Select G28 or G30 reference point return.
# 0 = G28, 1 = G30
#
# mi4 — mi10 (NOT USED)
#
# Reals:
#
# mr1 — mr10 (NOT USED)
#
# —————————————————————————
#Canned text:
# Entering cantext on a contour point from within Mastercam allows the
# following functions to enable/disable.
# Cantext value:
# 1 = Program Stop = output the «M00» stop code
# 2 = Optional Stop = output the «M01» optional stop code
# 3 = Block Delete on = turn on block delete codes in NC lines
# 4 = Block Delete off = turn off block delete codes in NC lines
#
# —————————————————————————
#Milling toolpaths (4 axis)
#Layout:
# The term «Reference View» refers to the coordinate system associated
# with the Top view (Alt-F9, the upper gnomon of the three displayed).
# Create the part drawing with the axis of rotation about the axis
# of the «Reference View» according to the setting you entered for
# ‘vmc’ (vertical or horizontal) and ‘rot_on_x’ (machine relative
# axis of rotation).
# vmc = 1 (vertical machine) uses the top toolplane as the base machine
# view.
# vmc = 0 (horizontal machine) uses the front toolplane as the base machine
# view.
# Relative to the machine matrix —
# Rotation zero position is on the Z axis for rotation on X axis.
# Rotation zero position is on the Z axis for rotation on Y axis.
# Rotation zero position is on the X axis for rotation on Z axis.
# The machine view rotated about the selected axis as a «single axis
# rotation» are the only legal views for 4 axis milling. Rotation
# direction around the part is positive in the CCW direction when
# viewed from the plus direction of the rotating axis. Set the variable
# ‘rot_ccw_pos’ to indicate the signed direction. Always set the work
# origin at the center of rotation.
#
#Toolplane Positioning:
# Create the Cplane and Tplane as the rotation of the machine view about
# the selected axis of rotation. The toolplane is used to calculate
# the position of the rotary axis. This is the default setting.
#
#3 Axis Rotary (Polar)
# Polar positioning is offered in Mastercam 3 axis toolpaths through the
# rotary axis options dialog. The selected toolpath is converted to angle
# and radius position. The axis of rotation is forced to zero.
#
#Axis substitution:
# Use the Rotary axis substitution by drawing the geometry flattened
# from the cylinder. The rotary axis button must be active for axis
# substitution information to be output to the NCI file. The radius of
# the rotary diameter is added to all the Z positions at output.
#
#Simultaneous 4 Axis (11 gcode):
# Full 4 axis toolpaths can be generated from various toolpaths under the
# ‘multi-axis’ selection (i.e. Rotary 4 axis). All 5 axis paths are
# converted to 4 axis paths where only the angle about the rotation axis
# is resolved.
#
#Drill:
# All drill methods are supported in the post. See Simultaneous 4 Axis.
#
# —————————————————————————
#Additional Notes:
# 1) G54 calls are generated where the work offset entry of 0 = G54,
# 1 = G55, etc.
# 2) Metric is applied from the NCI met_tool variable.
# 3) Incremental mode calculates motion from home position at toolchanges.
# The home position is used to define the last position of the tool
# for all toolchanges.
# 4) The variable ‘absinc’ is now pre-defined, set mi2 (Misc. Integer) for
# the ‘top level’ absolute/incremental program output. Subprograms are
# updated through the Mastercam dialog settings for sub-programs.
# 5) Always avoid machining to the center of rotation with rotary axis!
# 6) Transform subprograms are intended for use with G54.. workshifts.
#
# END_HEADER$
#
#endregion
#region Debugging and factory set program switches
# —————————————————————————
# Debugging and Factory Set Program Switches
# —————————————————————————
#Define Constants
m_one := -1
zero := 0
one := 1
two := 2
three := 3
four := 4
five := 5
c9k := 9999
bug4$ : 1 #Debug output with the tilde ‘~’.
#A value greater the zero applies the variable formatting with
#debug output (default is typically FS 1 but not a guarantee).
#A value of zero gets the value directly with NO formatting.
linktolvar$ : 0 #Associate X tolerance variables to V9- variable?
linkplnvar$ : 0 #Associate X plane specific variables to V9- variable?
skp_lead_flgs$ : 0 #Do NOT use v9 style contour flags
get_1004$ : 1 #Find gcode 1004 with getnextop?
rpd_typ_v7$ : 0 #Use Version 7 style contour flags/processing?
strtool_v7$ : 2 #Use Version 7+ toolname?
tlchng_aft$ : 2 #Delay call to toolchange until move line
cant_tlchng$ : 1 #Ignore cantext entry on move with tlchng_aft
newglobal$ : 1 #Error checking for global variables
getnextop$ : 1 #Build the next variable table
tooltable$ : 3 #Pre-read, call the pwrtt postblock
#endregion
#region General output settings
# —————————————————————————
# General Output Settings
# —————————————————————————
maxfeedpm : 500 #SET_BY_MD Limit for feed in inch/min
ltol_m : 0.05 #Length tolerance for arccheck, metric
vtol_m : 0.0025#System tolerance, metric
maxfeedpm_m : 10000 #SET_BY_MD Limit for feed in mm/min
force_wcs : yes$ #Force WCS output at every toolchange?
stagetool : 0 #SET_BY_CD 0 = Do not pre-stage tools, 1 = Stage tools
stagetltype : 1 #0 = Do not stage 1st tool
#1 = Stage 1st tool at last tool change
#2 = Stage 1st tool at end of file (peof)
use_gear : 0 #Output gear selection code, 0=no, 1=yes
min_speed : 50 #SET_BY_MD Minimum spindle speed
progname$ : 1 #Use uppercase for program name (sprogname)
prog_stop : 1 #Program stop at toolchange: 0=None, 1=M01, 2 = M00
tool_info : 2 #Output tooltable information?
#0 = Off — Do not output any tool comments or tooltable
#1 = Tool comments only
#2 = Tooltable in header — no tool comments at T/C
#3 = Tooltable in header — with tool comments at T/C
tlchg_home : no$ #Zero return X and Y axis prior to tool change?
# The following three initializations are used for full arc and helix arc output when the CD
# is set to output R or signed R for arcs
arctype$ : 2 #Arc center type XY plane 1=abs, 2=St-Ctr, 3=Ctr-St, 4=unsigned inc.
arctypexz$ : 2 #Arc center type XZ plane 1=abs, 2=St-Ctr, 3=Ctr-St, 4=unsigned inc.
arctypeyz$ : 2 #Arc center type YZ plane 1=abs, 2=St-Ctr, 3=Ctr-St, 4=unsigned inc.
#endregion
#region Rotary axis settings
# —————————————————————————
# Rotary Axis Settings
# —————————————————————————
read_md : no$ #Set rotary axis switches by reading Machine Definition?
vmc : 1 #SET_BY_MD 0 = Horizontal Machine, 1 = Vertical Mill
rot_on_x : 1 #SET_BY_MD Default Rotary Axis Orientation
#0 = Off, 1 = About X, 2 = About Y, 3 = About Z
rot_ccw_pos : 0 #SET_BY_MD Axis signed dir, 0 = CW positive, 1 = CCW positive
index : 0 #SET_BY_MD Use index positioning, 0 = Full Rotary, 1 = Index only
ctable : 5 #SET_BY_MD Degrees for each index step with indexing spindle
use_frinv : no$ #SET_BY_CD Use Inverse Time Feedrates in 4 Axis, (0 = no, 1 = yes)
maxfrdeg : 2000 #SET_BY_MD Limit for feed in deg/min
maxfrinv : 999.99#SET_BY_MD Limit for feed inverse time
maxfrinv_m : 99.99 #SET_BY_MD Maximum feedrate — inverse time
frc_cinit : yes$ #Force C axis reset at toolchange
ctol : 225 #Tolerance in deg. before rev flag changes
ixtol : 0.01 #Tolerance in deg. for index error
frdegstp : 10 #Step limit for rotary feed in deg/min
rot_type : 1 #SET_BY_MD Rotary type — 0=signed continuous, 1=signed absolute, 2=shortest direction
force_index : no$ #Force rotary output to index mode when tool plane positioning with a full rotary
use_rotmcode : 0 #Output M-Code for Axis direction (sindx_mc)
#0 = Signed direction (only valid when rot_type = 1)
#1 = M-Code for direction
toolismetric : 0 #flag that tool is metric
tap_feedtype : 1 #0 = Units Per Minute (G94)
#1 = Units Per Revolution (G95)
#Rotary Axis Label options
use_md_rot_label : no$ #Use rotary axis label from machine def? — Leave set to ‘no’ until available
srot_x : «A» #Label applied to rotary axis movement — rotating about X axis — used when use_md_rot_label = no
srot_y : «B» #Label applied to rotary axis movement — rotating about Y axis — used when use_md_rot_label = no
srot_z : «C» #Label applied to rotary axis movement — rotating about Z axis — used when use_md_rot_label = no
sminus : «-» #Address for the rotary axis (signed motion)
#Axis locking
use_rot_lock : no$ #Use rotary axis lock/unlock codes
#endregion
#region Common user-defined variable initializations (not switches!)
# —————————————————————————
# Common User-defined Variable Initializations (not switches!)
# —————————————————————————
xia : 0 #Formatted absolute value for X incremental calculations
yia : 0 #Formatted absolute value for Y incremental calculations
zia : 0 #Formatted absolute value for Z incremental calculations
cia : 0 #Formatted absolute value for C incremental calculations
cuttype : 0 #Cut type flag
#0 = Tool Plane, 1 = Axis Subs, 2 = Polar, 3 = 4/5 axis
bld : 0 #Block delete active
result : 0 #Return value for functions
sav_spc : 0 #Save spaces
sav_gcode : 0 #Gcode saved
sav_absinc : 0 #Absolute/Incremental Saved Value
sav_coolant : 0 #Coolant saved
sav_frc_wcs : 0 #Force work offset flag saved
toolchng : 1 #On a toolchange flag
toolchng0 : 0 #On a null toolchange flag
spdir2 : 1 #Copy for safe spindle direction calculation
#Drill variables
drlgsel : -1 #Drill Select Initialize
drillref : 0 #Select drill reference
drlgcode : 0 #Save Gcode in drill
sav_dgcode : 0 #Drill gcode saved
#Subprogram variables
mr_rt_actv : 0 #Flag to indicate if G51/G68 is active
#0=Off, 1=Rotate initial, 2=G68 Subprogram call/start, 3=Mirror, Neg. enable restore
mr_rt_rst : 0 #Flag to restore abs/inc when G51/G68 is active
rt_csav : 0 #C saved value
end_sub_mny : 0 #Many tool setting captured at transform sub end
#Rotary/Index variables
csav : 0 #C saved value
prvcabs : 0 #Saved cabs from pe_inc_calc,
#Used for rotary feed and direction calculations
cdelta : 0 #Calculation for angle change
cdelta_calc : 0 #Rotation calculation
rev : 0 #Calculation for deg/min
sav_rev : 0 #Saved revolution counter
indx_out : c9k #Rotation direction calculation
fmt 16 indx_mc #Rotation direction calculation
rev_brkflag : 0 #Revolution break flag. 0 = No break, 1 = Break every 90 or 360 degrees (see pmotion_su)
rot_locked : 1 #Flag to track status of rotary lock (0=unlocked, 1=locked), (Not a switch — initialized to 1 to force unlock with first rotary move)
#Vector Constants for Rotatary Calculations
aaxisx : 1 #A axis rotation vector constant
aaxisy : 0 #A axis rotation vector constant
aaxisz : 0 #A axis rotation vector constant
baxisx : 0 #B axis rotation vector constant
baxisy : 1 #B axis rotation vector constant
baxisz : 0 #B axis rotation vector constant
caxisx : 0 #C axis rotation vector constant
caxisy : 0 #C axis rotation vector constant
caxisz : 1 #C axis rotation vector constant
#Feedrate calculation variables
frdelta : 0 #Calculation for deg/min
frinv : 0 #Feedrate inverse time
frdeg : 0 #Feedrate deg/min actual
prvfrdeg : 0 #Feedrate deg/min actual
ldelta : 0 #Calculation for deg/min, linear
cldelta : 0 #Calculation for deg/min, linear and rotary
circum : 0 #Calculation for deg/min
ipr_type : 0 #Feedrate for Rotary, 0 = UPM, 1 = DPM, 2 = Inverse
comp_type : 0 #Cutter compensation type — 0=computer, 1=control, 2=wear, 3=reverse wear, 4=off
subs_before : 0 #Flag to indicate whether subprograms are to be output before or after main program
first_sub : 1 #Flag used to suppress blank line before first sub that gets output with subs before main
#rotary_axis2 values are not consistent with rot_on_x values. Need to add 1 to rotary_axis2 to compare them.
rotary_axis2 : c9k #Rotary axis selected in Multiaxis Drill and Curve 5 Axis, 0=X, 1=Y, 2=Z
#Coolant variables for X style coolant
cant_pos : 0 #Read from current canned text (cant_pos1 — cant_pos20)
coolant_bin : 0 #Binary value for current coolant command
coolant_on : 0 #Binary value holding the sum of all coolants currently on
coolantx : 0 #Selector variable for coolant string selector
local_int : 0 #Local variable for output of coolant off commands
result2 : 0 #Return value for functions
suppress : 0 #Flag used to suppress redundant coolant on commands
all_cool_off : 0 #First coolant off command shuts off ALL coolant options
#Variables to capture parameter values — use to set post switches in pset_mach
rotaxerror : 0 #Error flag
rot_axis : 0 #Axis of rotation — 1=X, 2=Y, 3=Z
rot_dir : 0 #Rotary direction — CW is positive, 0 = false, 1 = true
rot_index : 0 #Index or continuous — 0 = continuous, 1 = index
rot_angle : 0 #Degrees for each index step with indexing spindle
rot_zero : 0 #Rotary zero degree position (NOT CURRENTLY IMPLEMENTED)
rot_ax_cnt : 0 #Rotary axis counter
component_type : 0 #Component type: (See documentation for complete list — )
#0 = MACHINE
#1 = STOCK_COMPONENT
#2 = MISC_COMPONENT
#3 = MACHINE_BASE_COMPONENT
#4 = LINEAR_AXIS_COMPONENT
#5 = ROTARY_AXIS_COMPONENT
#6 = RECT_TABLE_COMPONENT
#12 = CHUCK_COMPONENT
#24 = TOOL_SPINDLE_COMPONENT
#23 = ATC_COMPONENT
z_dir : 0 #Z Axis direction flag
axis_label : 0 #Axis label — 1=X,2=Y,3=Z
srot_label : «» #Rotary Axis label (Generally A, B or C)
sav_srot_label : «» #Store original rotary axis label (required for signed rotation output rot_type = 1)
sav_index : 0 #Store original index value
#endregion
#region String definitions for NC output
# —————————————————————————
#String and string selector definitions for NC output
# —————————————————————————
#Address string definitions
strm : «M»
strn : «N»
stro : «O»
strp : «P»
srad : «R»
srminus : «R-«
sblank : «»
#Cantext string definitions (spaces must be padded here)
sm00 : «M00»
sm01 : «M01»
strtextno : «»
strcantext : «»
#Transform mirror and rotate codes
strns_mir_on : «G51.1» #Programmable mirror image code
strns_mir_off : «G50.1» #Programmable mirror image cancel code
strns_rot_on : «G68» #Coordinate System Rotation
strns_rot_off : «G69» #Coordinate System Rotation Cancel
#Misc. string definitions
sopen_prn : «(» #String for open parenthesis «(»
sclose_prn : «)» #String for close parenthesis «)»
sdelimiter : «|» #String for delimiter
sg95 : «G95» #Feed per rotation
sm29 : «M29» #Rigid tapping preperation support function
sg80 : «G80» #Cancel canned drilling cycle
sg43 : «G43» #Tool length compensation
sg49 : «G49» #Tool length compensation cancel
sg92 : «G92» #Set work piece coordinate system
sm06 : «M6» #Toolchange
#endregion
#region Error messages
# —————————————————————————
# Error messages
# —————————————————————————
saxiserror : «WARNING — DEFINED AXIS OF ROTATION DOES NOT MATCH OPERATION’S AXIS OF ROTATION — OUTPUT MAY BE INVALID»
sindxerror : «WARNING — INDEX ANGLE DOES NOT MATCH POST SETTING (‘ctable’)»
stlorgerr : «ERROR — TOOL ORIGIN DOES NOT MATCH CENTER OF ROTATION IN POLAR MILLING»
shomeserror : «ERROR — WORK OFFSET USAGE DOES NOT SUPPORT TRANSFORM SUBPROGRAM»
sprgnerror : «ERROR — SUBPROGRAM NUMBER MATCHES THE MAIN PROGRAM NUMBER»
srotaxerror : «ERROR — MORE THAN 1 ROTARY AXIS DETECTED IN SELECTED AXIS COMBINATION — OUTPUT MAY BE INVALID»
#endregion
#region String select, lookup tables for NC output
# —————————————————————————
# General G and M Code String select tables
# —————————————————————————
# Motion G code selection
sg00 : «G0» #Rapid
sg01 : «G1» #Linear feed
sg02 : «G2» #Circular interpolation CW
sg03 : «G3» #Circular interpolation CCW
sg04 : «G4» #Dwell
sgcode : «» #Target string
fstrsel sg00 gcode$ sgcode 5 -1
# —————————————————————————
# Select work plane G code
sg17 : «G17» #XY plane code
sg19 : «G19» #YZ plane code
sg18 : «G18» #XZ plane code
sgplane : «» #Target string
fstrsel sg17 plane$ sgplane 3 -1
# —————————————————————————
#Select english/metric code
sg20 : «G20» #Inch code
sg21 : «G21» #Metric code
smetric : «» #Target string
fstrsel sg20 met_tool$ smetric 2 -1
# —————————————————————————
#Select reference return code
sg28 : «G28» #First reference point return
sg30 : «G30» #Second reference point return
sg28ref : «» #Target string
fstrsel sg28 mi3$ sg28ref 2 -1
# —————————————————————————
# Cutter compensation G code selection
scc0 : «G40» #Cancel cutter compensation
scc1 : «G41» #Cutter compensation left
scc2 : «G42» #Cutter compensation right
sccomp : «» #Target string
fstrsel scc0 cc_pos$ sccomp 3 -1
# —————————————————————————
# Canned drill cycle string select
sg81 : «G81» #drill — no dwell
sg81d : «G82» #drill — with dwell
sg83 : «G83» #peck drill — no dwell
sg83d : «G83» #peck drill — with dwell
sg73 : «G73» #chip break — no dwell
sg73d : «G73» #chip break — with dwell
sg84 : «G84» #tap — right hand
sg84d : «G74» #tap — left hand
sg85 : «G85» #bore #1 — no dwell
sg85d : «G89» #bore #1 — with dwell
sg86 : «G86» #bore #2 — no dwell
sg86d : «G86» #bore #2 — with dwell
sgm1 : «G76» #fine bore — no dwell
sgm1d : «G76» #fine bore — with dwell
sgm2 : «G84» #rigid tap — right hand
sgm2d : «G74» #rigid tap — left hand
sgdrill : «» #Target string
fstrsel sg81 drlgsel sgdrill 16 -1
# —————————————————————————
# Select incremental or absolute G code
sg90 : «G90» #Absolute code
sg91 : «G91» #Incremental code
sgabsinc : «» #Target string
fstrsel sg90 absinc$ sgabsinc 2 -1
# —————————————————————————
# Feed mode G code selection
sg94 : «G94» #UPM
sg94d : «G94» #DPM, See pfcalc_deg if you use another gcode
sg93 : «G93» #Inverse
sgfeed : «» #Target string
fstrsel sg94 ipr_type sgfeed 3 -1
# —————————————————————————
#Canned drill cycle reference height
sg98 : «G98» #Reference at initht
sg99 : «G99» #Reference at refht
sgdrlref : «» #Target string
fstrsel sg98 drillref sgdrlref 2 -1
# —————————————————————————
# Generate string for spindle
sm04 : «M4» #Spindle reverse
sm05 : «M5» #Spindle off
sm03 : «M3» #Spindle forward
spindle : «» #Target string
fstrsel sm04 spdir2 spindle 3 -1
# —————————————————————————
# Coolant M code selection for V9 style coolant
# Note: To enable V9 style coolant, click on the General Machine Parameters icon
# in the Machine Definition Manager, Coolant tab, enable first check box
# Output of V9 style coolant commands in this post is controlled by scoolant
sm09 : «M9» #Coolant Off
sm08 : «M8» #Coolant Flood
sm08_1 : «M8» #Coolant Mist
sm08_2 : «M8» #Coolant Tool
scoolant : «» #Target string
fstrsel sm09 coolant$ scoolant 4 -1
# —————————————————————————
# Coolant output code selection for X style coolant
# Note: To enable X style coolant, click on the General Machine Parameters icon
# in the Machine Definition Manager, Coolant tab, disable first check box
# Output of X style coolant commands in this post is controlled by pcan, pcan1, & pcan2
scool50 : «M8» #Coolant 1 on value
scool51 : «M9» #Coolant 1 off value
scool52 : «M7» #Coolant 2 on value
scool53 : «M9» #Coolant 2 off value
scool54 : «M88» #Coolant 3 on value
scool55 : «M89» #Coolant 3 off value
scool56 : «M8(Coolant4=ON)» #Coolant 4 on value
scool57 : «M9(Coolant4=OFF)» #Coolant 4 off value
scool58 : «M8(Coolant5=ON)» #Coolant 5 on value
scool59 : «M9(Coolant5=OFF)» #Coolant 5 off value
scool60 : «M8(Coolant6=ON)» #Coolant 6 on value
scool61 : «M9(Coolant6=OFF)» #Coolant 6 off value
scool62 : «M8(Coolant7=ON)» #Coolant 7 on value
scool63 : «M9(Coolant7=OFF)» #Coolant 7 off value
scool64 : «M8(Coolant8=ON)» #Coolant 8 on value
scool65 : «M9(Coolant8=OFF)» #Coolant 8 off value
scool66 : «M8(Coolant9=ON)» #Coolant 9 on value
scool67 : «M9(Coolant9=OFF)» #Coolant 9 off value
scool68 : «M8(Coolant10=ON)» #Coolant 10 on value
scool69 : «M9(Coolant10=OFF)» #Coolant 10 off value
scoolantx : «» #Target string
fstrsel scool50 coolantx scoolantx 20 -1
# —————————————————————————
#X coolant has the option — First coolant off command shuts off ALL coolant options
sall_cool_off : «M09» #Coolant off command output with all_cool_off
# —————————————————————————
# Table rotation direction, index
sindx_cw : «M22» #Rotate CW code
sindx_ccw : «M21» #Rotate CCW code
sindx_mc : «» #Target string
fstrsel sindx_cw indx_mc sindx_mc 2 -1
# —————————————————————————
# Define the gear selection code
flktbl 1 3 #Lookup table definition — table no. — no. entries
40 0 #Low gear range
41 400 #Med gear range
42 2250 #Hi gear range
# —————————————————————————
# Define coolant binary value for X style coolant
flktbl 2 20 #Lookup table definition — table no. — no. entries
1 50 #Coolant 1 on value
2 51 #Coolant 1 off value
4 52 #Coolant 2 on value
8 53 #Coolant 2 off value
16 54 #Coolant 3 on value
32 55 #Coolant 3 off value
64 56 #Coolant 4 on value
128 57 #Coolant 4 off value
256 58 #Coolant 5 on value
512 59 #Coolant 5 off value
1024 60 #Coolant 6 on value
2048 61 #Coolant 6 off value
4096 62 #Coolant 7 on value
8192 63 #Coolant 7 off value
16384 64 #Coolant 8 on value
32768 65 #Coolant 8 off value
65536 66 #Coolant 9 on value
131072 67 #Coolant 9 off value
262144 68 #Coolant 10 on value
524288 69 #Coolant 10 off value
# —————————————————————————
# Month selector
smon0 : «»
smon1 : «JAN.»
smon2 : «FEB.»
smon3 : «MAR.»
smon4 : «APR.»
smon5 : «MAY.»
smon6 : «JUN.»
smon7 : «JUL.»
smon8 : «AUG.»
smon9 : «SEP.»
smon10 : «OCT.»
smon11 : «NOV.»
smon12 : «DEC.»
smonth : «» #Target string
fstrsel smon0 month$ smonth 13 -1
# —————————————————————————
# Cutter Compensation Type
scomp : «COMPUTER»
scomp1 : «CONTROL COMP»
scomp2 : «WEAR COMP»
scomp3 : «REVERSE WEAR COMP»
scomp4 : «OFF»
scomp_type : «» #Target string
fstrsel scomp comp_type scomp_type 5 -1
# —————————————————————————
# Rotary axis lock/unlock
sunlock : «M11» #Unlock Rotary Axis
slock : «M10» #Lock Rotary Axis
srot_lock : «» #Target string
fstrsel sunlock rot_locked srot_lock 2 -1
#endregion
#region Format statements
# —————————————————————————
# Format statements — n=nonmodal, l=leading, t=trailing, i=inc, d=delta
# —————————————————————————
#Default english/metric position format statements
fs2 1 0.7 0.6 #Decimal, absolute, 7 place, default for initialize (:)
fs2 2 0.4 0.3 #Decimal, absolute, 4/3 place
fs2 3 0.4 0.3d #Decimal, delta, 4/3 place
#Common format statements
fs2 4 1 0 1 0 #Integer, not leading
fs2 5 2 0 2 0l #Integer, force two leading
fs2 6 3 0 3 0l #Integer, force three leading
fs2 7 4 0 4 0l #Integer, force four leading
fs2 9 0.1 0.1 #Decimal, absolute, 1 place
fs2 10 0.2 0.2 #Decimal, absolute, 2 place
fs2 11 0.3 0.3 #Decimal, absolute, 3 place
fs2 12 0.4 0.4 #Decimal, absolute, 4 place
fs2 13 0.5 0.5 #Decimal, absolute, 5 place
fs2 14 0.3 0.3d #Decimal, delta, 3 place
fs2 15 0.2 0.1 #Decimal, absolute, 2/1 place (feedrate)
fs2 16 1 0 1 0n #Integer, forced output
fs2 17 0.2 0.3 #Decimal, absolute, 2/3 place (tapping feedrate)
# These formats used for ‘Date’ & ‘Time’
fs2 18 2.2 2.2lt #Decimal, force two leading & two trailing (time2)
fs2 19 2 0 2 0t #Integer, force trailing (hour)
fs2 20 0 2 0 2lt #Integer, force leading & trailing (min)
# This format statement is used for sequence number output
# Number of places output is determined by value for «Increment Sequence Number» in CD
# Max depth to the right of the decimal point is set in the fs statement below
fs2 21 0^7 0^7 #Decimal, 7 place, omit decimal if integer value
fs2 22 0^3 0^3 #Decimal, 3 place, omit decimal if integer value
#endregion
#region Format assignments
# —————————————————————————
# Toolchange / NC output Variable Formats
# —————————————————————————
fmt «T» 4 t$ #Tool number
fmt «T» 4 first_tool$ #First tool used
fmt «T» 4 next_tool$ #Next tool used
fmt «D» 4 tloffno$ #Diameter offset number
fmt «H» 4 tlngno$ #Length offset number
fmt «G» 4 g_wcs #WCS G address
fmt «P» 4 p_wcs #WCS P address
fmt «S» 4 speed #Spindle Speed
fmt «M» 4 gear #Gear range
# —————————————————————————
fmt «N» 21 n$ #Sequence number
fmt «X» 2 xabs #X position output
fmt «Y» 2 yabs #Y position output
fmt «Z» 2 zabs #Z position output
fmt «X» 3 xinc #X position output
fmt «Y» 3 yinc #Y position output
fmt «Z» 3 zinc #Z position output
fmt «A» 11 cabs #C axis position
fmt «A» 14 cinc #C axis position
fmt «A» 22 indx_out #Index position
fmt «R» 14 rt_cinc #C axis position, G68
fmt «I» 3 iout #Arc center description in X
fmt «J» 3 jout #Arc center description in Y
fmt «K» 3 kout #Arc center description in Z
fmt «R» 2 arcrad$ #Arc Radius
fmt «F» 15 feed #Feedrate
fmt «P» 11 dwell$ #Dwell
fmt «M» 5 cantext$ #Canned text
fmt «F» 2 pitch #Tap pitch (units per thread)
# —————————————————————————
#Move comment (pound) to output colon with program numbers
fmt «O» 7 progno$ #Program number
#fmt «:» 7 progno$ #Program number
fmt «O» 7 main_prg_no$ #Program number
#fmt «:» 7 main_prg_no$ #Program number
fmt «O» 7 sub_prg_no$ #Program number
#fmt «:» 7 sub_prg_no$ #Program number
fmt «X» 2 sub_trnsx$ #Rotation point
fmt «Y» 2 sub_trnsy$ #Rotation point
fmt «Z» 2 sub_trnsz$ #Rotation point
# —————————————————————————
fmt «Q» 2 peck1$ #First peck increment (positive)
fmt «Q» 2 shftdrl$ #Fine bore tool shift
fmt «R» 2 refht_a #Reference height
fmt «R» 2 refht_i #Reference height
# —————————————————————————
fmt «TOOL — » 4 tnote #Note format
fmt «DIA. OFF. — » 4 toffnote #Note format
fmt «LEN. — » 4 tlngnote #Note format
fmt «TOOL DIA. — » 1 tldia$ #Note format
fmt «XY STOCK TO LEAVE — » 2 xy_stock #Note format
fmt «Z STOCK TO LEAVE — » 2 z_stock #Note format
# —————————————————————————
fmt 4 year2 #Calculated year value
fmt 18 time2 #Capture 24-hour time value into ‘time2’ variable
fmt 19 hour #Hour
fmt 20 min #Minutes
year2 = year$ + 2000
#endregion
#region Tool comment, tool table, manual entry output
# —————————————————————————
# Tool Comment / Manual Entry Section
# —————————————————————————
ptoolcomment #Comment for tool
tnote = t$, toffnote = tloffno$, tlngnote = tlngno$
if tool_info = 1 | tool_info = 3,
sopen_prn, pstrtool, sdelimiter, *tnote, sdelimiter, *toffnote, sdelimiter, *tlngnote, sdelimiter, *tldia$, sclose_prn, e$
ptooltable #Tooltable output
sopen_prn, *t$, sdelimiter, pstrtool, sdelimiter, *tlngno$,
[if comp_type > 0 & comp_type < 4, sdelimiter, *tloffno$, sdelimiter, *scomp_type, sdelimiter, *tldia$],
[if xy_stock <> 0 | z_stock <> 0, sdelimiter, *xy_stock, sdelimiter, *z_stock],
sclose_prn, e$
xy_stock = 0 #Reset stock to leave values
z_stock = 0 #Reset stock to leave values
pstrtool #Comment for tool
if strtool$ <> sblank,
[
strtool$ = ucase(strtool$)
*strtool$
]
pcomment$ #Comment from manual entry (must call pcomment2)
pcomment2 #Required if doing boolean ‘if’ logic testing!
pcomment2 #Output Comment from manual entry
scomm$ = ucase (scomm$)
if gcode$ = 1005, sopen_prn, scomm$, sclose_prn, e$ #Manual entry — as comment
if gcode$ = 1006, scomm$, e$ #Manual entry — as code
if gcode$ = 1007, sopen_prn, scomm$, sclose_prn #Manual entry — as comment with move NO e$
if gcode$ = 1026, scomm$ #Manual entry — as code with move NO e$
if gcode$ = 1008, sopen_prn, scomm$, sclose_prn, e$ #Operation comment
if gcode$ = 1051, sopen_prn, scomm$, sclose_prn, e$ #Machine name
if gcode$ = 1052, sopen_prn, scomm$, sclose_prn, e$ #Group comment
if gcode$ = 1053, sopen_prn, scomm$, sclose_prn, e$ #Group name
if gcode$ = 1054, sopen_prn, scomm$, sclose_prn, e$ #File Descriptor
#endregion
#region Header, date/time
# —————————————————————————
# Start of File and Toolchange Setup
# —————————————————————————
ptime #Convert 24-hour time format into 12-hour AM/PM format
if time$ >= 13, time2 = (time$ — 12)
else, time2 = time$
hour = int(time2), min = frac(time2)
*hour, «:», *min,
if time$ > 12, » PM»
else, » AM»
pheader$ #Call before start of file
if subs_before, » «, e$ #header character is output from peof when subs are output before main
else, «%», e$
sav_spc = spaces$
spaces$ = 0
*progno$, sopen_prn, sprogname$, sclose_prn, e$
#sopen_prn, «PROGRAM NAME — «, sprogname$, sclose_prn, e$
sopen_prn, «DATE=DD-MM-YY — «, date$, » TIME=HH:MM — «, time$, sclose_prn, e$ #Date and time output Ex. 12-02-05 15:52
#sopen_prn, «DATE — «, month$, «-«, day$, «-«, year$, sclose_prn, e$ #Date output as month,day,year — Ex. 02-12-05
#sopen_prn, «DATE — «, *smonth, » «, day$, » «, *year2, sclose_prn, e$ #Date output as month,day,year — Ex. Feb. 12 2005
#sopen_prn, «TIME — «, time$, sclose_prn, e$ #24 hour time output — Ex. 15:52
#sopen_prn, «TIME — «, ptime sclose_prn, e$ #12 hour time output 3:52 PM
spathnc$ = ucase(spathnc$)
smcname$ = ucase(smcname$)
stck_matl$ = ucase(stck_matl$)
snamenc$ = ucase(snamenc$)
sopen_prn, «MCX FILE — «, *smcpath$, *smcname$, *smcext$, sclose_prn, e$
sopen_prn, «NC FILE — «, *spathnc$, *snamenc$, *sextnc$, sclose_prn, e$
sopen_prn, «MATERIAL — «, *stck_matl$, sclose_prn, e$
spaces$ = sav_spc
#endregion
#region Start of file
psof0$ #Start of file for tool zero
psof$
psof$ #Start of file for non-zero tool number
pcuttype
toolchng = one
if ntools$ = one,
[
#skip single tool outputs, stagetool must be on
stagetool = m_one
!next_tool$
]
pbld, n$, *smetric, e$
if convert_rpd$, pconvert_rpd
pbld, n$, [if gcode$, *sgfeed], *sgcode, *sgplane, scc0, sg49, sg80, *sgabsinc, [if gcode$, *feed], e$
sav_absinc = absinc$
if mi1$ <= one, #Work coordinate system
[
absinc$ = one
pfbld, n$, sgabsinc, *sg28ref, «Z0.», e$
pfbld, n$, *sg28ref, «X0.», «Y0.», e$
pfbld, n$, sg92, *xh$, *yh$, *zh$, e$
absinc$ = sav_absinc
]
pcom_moveb
pcheckaxis
c_mmlt$ #Multiple tool subprogram call
ptoolcomment
comment$
pcan
pbld, n$, *t$, sm06, e$
pindex
if mi1$ > one, absinc$ = zero
if use_rot_lock & (cuttype <> zero | (index = zero & prv_cabs <> fmtrnd(cabs))), prot_unlock
if convert_rpd$, pconvert_rpd
pcan1, pbld, n$, [if gcode$, *sgfeed], *sgcode, *sgabsinc, pwcs, pfxout, pfyout, pfcout,
[if nextdc$ <> 7, *speed, *spindle], pgear, [if gcode$, *feed], strcantext, e$
if use_rot_lock & cuttype = zero, prot_lock
pbld, n$, sg43, *tlngno$, pfzout, pscool, pstagetool, e$
absinc$ = sav_absinc
pbld, n$, sgabsinc, e$
pcom_movea
toolchng = zero
c_msng$ #Single tool subprogram call
#endregion
#region Tool change
#region Null tool change
ptlchg0$ #Call from NCI null tool change (tool number repeats)
pcuttype
toolchng0 = one
pcom_moveb
pcheckaxis
c_mmlt$ #Multiple tool subprogram call
comment$
pcan
result = newfs(15, feed) #Reset the output format for ‘feed’
pbld, n$, sgplane, e$
pspindchng
pbld, n$, pscool, e$
if use_rot_lock & (cuttype <> zero | (index = zero & prv_cabs <> fmtrnd(cabs))), prot_unlock
if mi1$ > one & workofs$ <> prv_workofs$,
[
sav_absinc = absinc$
absinc$ = zero
pbld, n$, sgabsinc, pwcs, pfxout, pfyout, pfzout, pfcout, e$
pe_inc_calc
ps_inc_calc
absinc$ = sav_absinc
]
if cuttype = zero, ppos_cax_lin
if gcode$ = one, plinout
else, prapidout
if use_rot_lock & cuttype = zero, prot_lock
pcom_movea
toolchng0 = zero
c_msng$ #Single tool subprogram call
!xnci$, !ynci$, !znci$
#endregion
#region Tool change / stage tool
ptlchg$ #Tool change
pcuttype
toolchng = one
if mi1$ = one, #Work coordinate system
[
pfbld, n$, *sg28ref, «X0.», «Y0.», e$
pfbld, n$, sg92, *xh$, *yh$, *zh$, e$
]
if prog_stop = 1, pbld, n$, *sm01, e$
if prog_stop = 2, pbld, n$, *sm00, e$
pcom_moveb
pcheckaxis
c_mmlt$ #Multiple tool subprogram call
ptoolcomment
comment$
pcan
result = newfs(15, feed) #Reset the output format for ‘feed’
pbld, n$, *t$, sm06, e$
pindex
sav_absinc = absinc$
if mi1$ > one, absinc$ = zero
if use_rot_lock & (cuttype <> zero | (index = zero & prv_cabs <> fmtrnd(cabs))), prot_unlock
if convert_rpd$, pconvert_rpd
pcan1, pbld, n$, [if gcode$, *sgfeed], *sgcode, *sgabsinc, pwcs, pfxout, pfyout, pfcout,
[if nextdc$ <> 7, *speed, *spindle], pgear, [if gcode$, *feed], strcantext, e$
if use_rot_lock & cuttype = zero, prot_lock
pbld, n$, sg43, *tlngno$, pfzout, pscool, pstagetool, e$
absinc$ = sav_absinc
pbld, n$, sgabsinc, e$
pcom_movea
toolchng = zero
c_msng$ #Single tool subprogram call
!xnci$, !ynci$, !znci$
pstagetool #Pre-stage tools
if stagetool = 1,
[
if ttblend$, #Check for last toolchange
[
if stagetltype = 1, *next_tool$ #stage first tool at last toolchange
]
else, *next_tool$ #stage tool at every toolchange
]
#endregion
#End of Tool change region
#endregion
#region Retract at end of tool path, reference return
pretract #End of tool path, toolchange
sav_absinc = absinc$
absinc$ = one
sav_coolant = coolant$
coolant$ = zero
# if nextop$ = 1003, #Uncomment this line to leave coolant on until eof unless
[ # explicitely turned off through a canned text edit
if all_cool_off,
[
#all coolant off with a single off code here
if coolant_on, pbld, n$, sall_cool_off, e$
coolant_on = zero
]
else,
[
local_int = zero
coolantx = zero
while local_int < 20 & coolant_on > 0,
[
coolantx = and(2^local_int, coolant_on)
local_int = local_int + one
if coolantx > zero,
[
coolantx = local_int
pbld, n$, scoolantx, e$
]
coolantx = zero
]
coolant_on = zero
]
]
#cc_pos is reset in the toolchange here
cc_pos$ = zero
gcode$ = zero
if use_rot_lock & rot_on_x,
[
if (index = one & (prv_indx_out <> fmtrnd(indx_out)) | (prv_cabs <> fmtrnd(cabs)))
| nextop$ = 1003 | frc_cinit, prot_unlock
]
pbld, n$, sccomp, *sm05, psub_end_mny, e$
if convert_rpd$, pconvert_rpd
pbld, n$, [if gcode$, sgfeed], sgabsinc, sgcode, *sg28ref, «Z0.», [if gcode$, feed], scoolant, e$
if nextop$ = 1003 | tlchg_home, pbld, n$, *sg28ref, «X0.», «Y0.», protretinc, e$
else, pbld, n$, protretinc, e$
absinc$ = sav_absinc
coolant$ = sav_coolant
protretinc #Reset the C axis revolution counter
if frc_cinit & rot_on_x,
[
rev = zero
sav_rev = zero
cabs = zero
csav = zero
indx_out = zero
if index, e$, pindxcalc, pindex
else, *cabs
prvcabs = zero
!csav, !cabs
]
#endregion
#region End-of-file
peof0$ #End of file for tool zero
peof$
peof$ #End of file for non-zero tool
pretract
comment$
if stagetool = 1 & stagetltype = 2, pbld, n$, *first_tool$, e$
n$, «M30», e$
if subs_before, #Merge subs before main program
[ #At this point, the NC / Main program level is blank (Main prg was written to ext with subs before)
subout$ = zero
«%», e$
mergesub$ #Merge transform subs
clearsub$
mergeaux$ #Merge non-transform subs
clearaux$
mergeext$ #Merge NC / Main program
clearext$
]
else, #Merge subs after main program
[ #At this point, the NC / Main program is written (Main prg was written to NC level with subs after)
mergesub$
clearsub$
mergeaux$
clearaux$
]
subout$ = zero
«%», e$
#endregion
#region Work offsets, gear selection
pwcs #G54+ coordinate setting at toolchange
if mi1$ > one,
[
sav_frc_wcs = force_wcs
if sub_level$ > 0, force_wcs = zero
if workofs$ <> prv_workofs$ | (force_wcs & toolchng),
[
if workofs$ < 6,
[
g_wcs = workofs$ + 54
*g_wcs
]
else,
[
p_wcs = workofs$ — five
«G54.1», *p_wcs
]
]
force_wcs = sav_frc_wcs
!workofs$
]
pgear #Find spindle gear from lookup table
if use_gear = one,
[
gear = frange (one, speed)
*gear
]
#endregion
#region Tool change setup, spindle speed, tool end
#Toolchange setup
pspindchng #Spindle speed change
if prv_spdir2 <> spdir2 & prv_speed <> zero, pbld, n$, *sm05, e$
if prv_speed <> speed | prv_spdir2 <> spdir2,
[
if speed, pbld, n$, *speed, *spindle, pgear, e$
]
!speed, !spdir2
pspindle #Spindle speed calculations for RPM
speed = abs(ss$)
if speed,
[
if speed > maxss$, speed = maxss$
if speed < min_speed, speed = min_speed
]
spdir2 = fsg3(spdir$)
pq$ #Setup post based on switch settings
stagetool = bldnxtool$ #Set stagetool from CD setting
result = newfs(11, cdelta_calc) #Format for 3 place precision
ptoolend$ #End of tool path, before reading new tool data
!speed, !spdir2
ptlchg1002$ #Call at actual toolchange, end last path here
if op_id$ <> prv_op_id$, pset_mach #Set rotary switches by reading machine def parameters
if cuttype <> one, sav_rev = rev #Axis Sub does not update to rev
pspindle
whatline$ = four #Required for vector toolpaths
if gcode$ = 1000,
[
#Null toolchange
]
else,
[
#Toolchange and Start of file
if gcode$ = 1002,
[
#Actual toolchange
pretract
]
if stagetool = one, prv_next_tool$ = m_one
prv_xia = vequ(xh$)
prv_feed = c9k
]
!op_id$
#endregion
#region Motion output
# —————————————————————————
# Motion NC output
# —————————————————————————
#region NC output postblocks
# —————————————————————————
#The variables for absolute output are xabs, yabs, zabs.
#The variables for incremental output are xinc, yinc, zinc.
# —————————————————————————
prapidout #Output to NC of linear movement — rapid
if convert_rpd$, pconvert_rpd
pcan1, pbld, n$, [if gcode$, `sgfeed], sgplane, `sgcode, sgabsinc, pccdia,
pxout, pyout, pzout, pcout, [if gcode$, `feed], strcantext, pscool, e$
#Modify following line to customize output for high-speed toolpath
#tool inspection/change points
if rpd_typ$ = 7, pbld, n$, «M00», «(TOOL INSPECTION POINT — POST CUSTOMIZATION REQUIRED)», e$
plinout #Output to NC of linear movement — feed
pcan1, pbld, n$, sgfeed, sgplane, `sgcode, sgabsinc, pccdia,
pxout, pyout, pzout, pcout, feed, strcantext, pscool, e$
#Modify following line to customize output for high-speed toolpath
#tool inspection/change points
if rpd_typ$ = 7, pbld, n$, «M00», «(TOOL INSPECTION POINT — POST CUSTOMIZATION REQUIRED)», e$
pcirout #Output to NC of circular interpolation
pcan1, pbld, n$, `sgfeed, sgplane, sgcode, sgabsinc, pccdia,
pxout, pyout, pzout, pcout, parc, feed, strcantext, pscool, e$
#endregion
#region Motion preparation routines
pcom_moveb #Common motion preparation routines, before
pxyzcout
ps_inc_calc
pncoutput #Movement output
pcom_moveb
comment$
pcan
if mr_rt_actv,
[
!cabs, !cinc #No rotary in sub
]
else,
[
if cuttype = zero, ppos_cax_lin #Toolplane rotary positioning
]
if gcode$ = zero, prapidout
if gcode$ = one, plinout
if gcode$ > one & gcode$ < four, pcirout
if mr_rt_rst, #Restore absolute/incremental for G51/G68
[
absinc$ = sav_absinc
mr_rt_rst = zero
]
pcom_movea
pcom_movea #Common motion preparation routines, after
pcan2
pe_inc_calc
pdwl_spd$ #Call from NCI gcode 4
pspindle
comment$
pspindchng
pcan
if fmtrnd(dwell$), pcan1, pbld, n$, *sgcode, *dwell$, strcantext, e$
else, pcan1, pbld, n$, strcantext, e$
pcan2
prapid$ #Output to NC of linear movement — rapid
pncoutput
pzrapid$ #Output to NC of linear movement — rapid Z only
pncoutput
plin$ #Output to NC of linear movement — feed
pncoutput
pz$ #Output to NC of linear movement — feed Z only
pncoutput
pmx$ #Output to NC of vector NCI
pncoutput
pcir$ #Output to NC of circular interpolation
pncoutput
#Pre-process rotary motion control flags
pmx0$ #5 axis gcode setup
if drillcur$ = zero,
[
if fr$ = -2, gcode$ = zero
else, gcode$ = one
]
plin0$ #Linear movement, mill motion test
pmotion_su
pcir0$ #Circular interpolation, mill arc motion test
pmotion_su
#endregion
#region Motion output components
# —————————————————————————
# Motion output components
# —————————————————————————
pbld #Canned text — block delete
if bld, ‘/’
pfbld #Force — block delete
«/»
pccdia #Cutter Compensation
#Force Dxx#
if prv_cc_pos$ <> cc_pos$ & cc_pos$, prv_tloffno$ = c9k
sccomp
if cc_pos$, tloffno$
pscool #Coolant output
scoolant #Old style coolant — based on NCI variable «coolant$»
pcan1_cool #X style coolant — based on Canned Text coolant
pfxout #Force X axis output
if absinc$ = zero, *xabs, !xinc
else, *xinc, !xabs
pxout #X output
if absinc$ = zero, xabs, !xinc
else, xinc, !xabs
pfyout #Force Y axis output
if absinc$ = zero, *yabs, !yinc
else, *yinc, !yabs
pyout #Y output
if absinc$ = zero, yabs, !yinc
else, yinc, !yabs
pfzout #Force Z axis output
if absinc$ = zero, *zabs, !zinc
else, *zinc, !zabs
pzout #Z output
if absinc$ = zero, zabs, !zinc
else, zinc, !zabs
pfcout #Force C axis output
if index = zero & rot_on_x,
[
if use_rotmcode & cabs <> prv_cabs, *sindx_mc
if absinc$ = zero, *cabs, !cinc
else, *cinc, !cabs
]
pcout #C axis output
if index = zero & rot_on_x,
[
if use_rotmcode & cabs <> prv_cabs, *sindx_mc
if absinc$ = zero, cabs, !cinc
else, cinc, !cabs
]
pindex #Index output
if index & rot_on_x,
[
if (prv_indx_out <> fmtrnd(indx_out)) | (prv_cabs <> fmtrnd(cabs)),
[
if use_rot_lock, prot_unlock
pbld, n$, [if use_rotmcode, `sindx_mc], *indx_out, e$
!cabs, !cinc
]
if use_rot_lock, prot_lock
]
prot_unlock #Unlock Rotary axis
rot_locked = zero
pbld, n$, srot_lock, e$
prot_lock #Lock Rotary axis
if nextop$ <> 1003,
[
rot_locked = one
pbld, n$, srot_lock, e$
]
parc #Select the arc output
if (plane$ = zero & (arctype$ = one | arctype$ = four)) | #XY Plane
(plane$ = one & (arctypeyz$ = one | arctypeyz$ = four)) | #YZ Plane
(plane$ = two & (arctypexz$ = one | arctypexz$ = four)), #XZ Plane
[
result = newfs(two, iout)
result = newfs(two, jout)
result = newfs(two, kout)
]
else,
[
result = newfs(three, iout)
result = newfs(three, jout)
result = newfs(three, kout)
]
if (plane$ = 0 & arctype$ < five) | (plane$ = 1 & arctypeyz$ < five) |
(plane$ = 2 & arctypexz$ < five) | full_arc_flg$ | arc_pitch$,
[
#Arc output for IJK
# If you do NOT want to force out the I,J,K values,
# remove the «*» asterisks on the *i, *j, *k ‘s below…
if plane$ = zero, *iout, *jout, kout #XY plane code — G17
if plane$ = one, iout, *jout, *kout #YZ plane code — G19
if plane$ = two, *iout, jout, *kout #XZ plane code — G18
!i$, !j$, !k$
]
else,
[
#Arc output for R
if abs(sweep$)<=180 | (plane$ = 0 & arctype$ = five) | (plane$ = 1 & arctypeyz$ = five) |
(plane$ = 2 & arctypexz$ = five), result = nwadrs(srad, arcrad$)
else, result = nwadrs(srminus, arcrad$)
*arcrad$
]
ppos_cax_lin #Position the rotary axis before move — rapid
if index, pindex
else,
[
if fmtrnd(prv_cabs) <> fmtrnd(cabs) & rot_on_x,
[
sav_gcode = gcode$
gcode$ = zero
if convert_rpd$, pconvert_rpd
pbld, n$, [if gcode$, sgfeed], sgcode, pcout, [if gcode$, feed], e$
!cia
ps_cinc_calc
gcode$ = sav_gcode
]
]
#endregion
#End of Motion output region
#endregion
#region Drilling
#region Canned drill cycles, pre-process, first hole
# —————————————————————————
# Drilling
# —————————————————————————
pdrill0$ #Pre-process before drill call
sav_dgcode = gcode$ #Capture gcode for 5 axis drill
pdrlcommonb #Canned Drill Cycle common call, before
if initht$ <> refht$, drillref = zero
else, drillref = one
if sav_dgcode = 81,
[
result = newfs(two, zinc)
if drillcyc$ = three | drillcyc$ = 7, drlgsel = fsg1(-ss$) + drillcyc$ * two
else, drlgsel = fsg2(dwell$) + drillcyc$ * two
prv_refht_a = c9k
prv_refht_i = c9k
prv_dwell$ = zero
prv_shftdrl$ = zero
]
if cuttype = three, sav_dgcode = gcode$
else, z$ = depth$
if cuttype = one, prv_zia = refht$ + (rotdia$/two)
else, prv_zia = refht$
pcom_moveb
feed = fr_pos$
comment$
pcan
#5 axis must map the true Z, correct Z calculation here
if cuttype = three,
[
prv_zia = zabs + (-depth$) + refht$
zia = fmtrnd(zabs)
zinc = zia — prv_zia
]
prdrlout #R drill position
if cuttype = one, refht_a = refht$ + (rotdia$ / two)
else, refht_a = refht$
refht_i = refht$ — initht$
if cuttype = three, refht_a = w$
if absinc$ = zero, refht_a, !refht_i
else, refht_i, !refht_a
pdrill$ #Canned Drill Cycle
pdrlcommonb
pcan1, pbld, n$, *sgdrlref, *sgdrill, pxout, pyout, pfzout, pcout,
prdrlout, dwell$, *feed, strcantext, e$
pcom_movea
ppeck$ #Canned Peck Drill Cycle
pdrlcommonb
pcan1, pbld, n$, *sgdrlref, *sgdrill, pxout, pyout, pfzout, pcout,
prdrlout, *peck1$, *feed, strcantext, e$
pcom_movea
pchpbrk$ #Canned Chip Break Cycle
pdrlcommonb
pcan1, pbld, n$, *sgdrlref, *sgdrill, pxout, pyout, pfzout, pcout,
prdrlout, *peck1$, *feed, strcantext, e$
pcom_movea
ptap$ #Canned Tap Cycle
pdrlcommonb
result = newfs(17, feed) # Set for tapping Feedrate format
if met_tool$,
[
if toolismetric, pitch = n_tap_thds$ #Metric NC Code — Metric Tap
else, pitch = (1/n_tap_thds$) * 25.4 #Metric NC Code — English Tap
]
else,
[
if toolismetric, pitch = n_tap_thds$ * (1/25.4) #English NC Code — Metric Tap
else, pitch = 1/n_tap_thds$ #English NC Code — English Tap
]
pitch = pitch * speed #Force Units Per Minute for regular Tap cycle
pbld, n$, sg94, e$
pcan1, pbld, n$, *sgdrlref, *sgdrill, pxout, pyout, pfzout, pcout,
prdrlout, *pitch, !feed, strcantext, e$
pcom_movea
pbore1$ #Canned Bore #1 Cycle
pdrlcommonb
pcan1, pbld, n$, *sgdrlref, *sgdrill, pxout, pyout, pfzout, pcout,
prdrlout, dwell$, *feed, strcantext, e$
pcom_movea
pbore2$ #Canned Bore #2 Cycle
pdrlcommonb
pcan1, pbld, n$, *sgdrlref, *sgdrill, pxout, pyout, pfzout, pcout,
prdrlout, *feed, strcantext, e$
pcom_movea
pmisc1$ #Canned Fine Bore (shift) Cycle
pdrlcommonb
pcan1, pbld, n$, *sgdrlref, *sgdrill, pxout, pyout, pfzout, pcout,
prdrlout, shftdrl$, dwell$, *feed, strcantext, e$
pcom_movea
pmisc2$ #Canned Rigid Tapping Cycle
pdrlcommonb
#RH/LH based on spindle direction
if met_tool$,
[
if toolismetric, pitch = n_tap_thds$ #Metric NC Code — Metric Tap
else, pitch = (1/n_tap_thds$) * 25.4 #Metric NC Code — English Tap
]
else,
[
if toolismetric, pitch = n_tap_thds$ * (1/25.4) #English NC Code — Metric Tap
else, pitch = 1/n_tap_thds$ #English NC Code — English Tap
]
if tap_feedtype = 0,
[
pitch = pitch * speed
pbld, n$, sg94, e$
]
else, pbld, n$, sg95, e$
pbld, n$, sm29, *speed, e$
pcan1, pbld, n$, *sgdrlref, *sgdrill, pxout, pyout, pfzout,
prdrlout, *pitch, !feed, strcantext, e$
pcom_movea
#endregion
#region Custom drill cycles (cycles 8-19), first hole
pdrlcst$ #Custom drill cycles 8 — 19 (user option)
#Use this postblock to customize drilling cycles 8 — 19
if drillcyc$ = 8, pdrlcst8
else,
[
pdrlcommonb
sopen_prn, «CUSTOMIZABLE DRILL CYCLE — NOT CONFIGURED — FIRST HOLE», sclose_prn, e$
pcom_movea
]
pdrlcst8 #Custom drill cycle 8 — example custom cycle
pdrlcommonb
sopen_prn, «CUSTOMIZABLE DRILL CYCLE EXAMPLE — FIRST HOLE», sclose_prn, e$
pcan1, pbld, n$, *sgdrlref, *sgdrill, pxout, pyout, pfzout, pcout,
prdrlout, shftdrl$, dwell$, *feed, strcantext, e$
pcom_movea
#endregion
#region Canned drill cycles (additional holes)
# Additional Holes
pdrill_2$ #Canned Drill Cycle, additional points
pdrlcommonb
pcan1, pbld, n$, pxout, pyout, pzout, pcout, prdrlout, feed, strcantext, e$
pcom_movea
ppeck_2$ #Canned Peck Drill Cycle
pdrill_2$
pchpbrk_2$ #Canned Chip Break Cycle
pdrill_2$
ptap_2$ #Canned Tap Cycle
pdrill_2$
pbore1_2$ #Canned Bore #1 Cycle
pdrill_2$
pbore2_2$ #Canned Bore #2 Cycle
pdrill_2$
pmisc1_2$ #Canned Fine Bore (shift) Cycle
pdrill_2$
pmisc2_2$ #Canned Rigid Tapping Cycle
pdrlcommonb
pcan1, pbld, n$, pxout, pyout, pzout, pcout, prdrlout, strcantext, e$
pcom_movea
#endregion
#region Custom drill cycles (cycles 8-19), additional holes
pdrlcst_2$ #Custom drill cycles 8 — 19, additional points (user option)
#Use this postblock to customize drilling cycles 8 — 19
if drillcyc$ = 8, pdrlcst8_2
else,
[
sopen_prn, «CUSTOMIZABLE DRILL CYCLE — NOT CONFIGURED — NEXT HOLE», sclose_prn, e$
pdrill_2$
]
pdrlcst8_2 #Custom drill cycle 8 — example custom cycle
sopen_prn, «CUSTOMIZABLE DRILL CYCLE EXAMPLE — NEXT HOLE», sclose_prn, e$
pdrill_2$
#endregion
#region Cancel canned drill cycle
pcanceldc$ #Cancel canned drill cycle
result = newfs(three, zinc)
z$ = initht$
if cuttype = one, prv_zia = initht$ + (rotdia$/two)
else, prv_zia = initht$
pxyzcout
!zabs, !zinc
prv_gcode$ = zero
pcan
pcan1, pbld, n$, sg80, strcantext, e$
if (drillcyc$ = 3 | drillcyc$ = 7) & tap_feedtype, pbld, n$, sg94, e$
result = newfs(15, feed) #Reset the output format for ‘feed’
pcan2
#endregion
#end of Drilling region
#endregion
#region Subprograms
# —————————————————————————
#Subprogram postblocks
#sub_trnstyp — 0=mirror, 1=rotate, 2=scale, 3=translate
#sub_trnmthd (mirror) — 0=X axis, 1=Y axis, 2=line
#sub_trnmthd (rotate) — 0=tplane, 1=tplane origin only, 2=coordinates
# —————————————————————————
psub_call_m$ #Call to main level, single tool
psub_call_trans
psub_call_mm$ #Call to main level, multiple tools
psub_call_trans
psub_call_trans #Translate level calls from toolchange, user
if mi1$ <= one, result = mprint(shomeserror)
sav_absinc = absinc$
pindex
#Mirror or Rotate Coord’s
if sub_trnstyp$ = zero, mr_rt_actv = three #Mirror
if mr_rt_actv,
[
if sub_trnstyp$ = zero,
[
#The original pattern is not mirrored
if sub_chn_no$ <> one,
[
absinc$ = zero
psub_mirror
]
]
else,
[
#The original pattern is not rotated, calculate the rotation incremental angle for G68
rt_csav = atan2(sub_m2$, sub_m1$)
if sub_sec_no$,
[
rt_cinc = prv_rt_csav — rt_csav
while rt_cinc > 180, rt_cinc = rt_cinc — 360
while rt_cinc < -180, rt_cinc = rt_cinc + 360
if rot_ccw_pos = one, rt_cinc = -rt_cinc
!rt_csav
absinc$ = zero
psub_rotate
]
else,
[
!rt_csav
]
]
#Set restore flag and sign mr_rt_actv to indicate active
mr_rt_rst = one
mr_rt_actv = -abs(mr_rt_actv)
]
else, #Translate all, Rotate toolplane
[
if sub_mny_t$,
[
if mi1$ > one, absinc$ = zero
if convert_rpd$, pconvert_rpd
pbld, n$, [if gcode$, *sgfeed], *sgcode, *sgabsinc, pwcs, pfxout, pfyout, pfzout, pfcout, [if gcode$, *feed], e$
pe_inc_calc
ps_inc_calc
]
]
absinc$ = sav_absinc
result = nwadrs(strp, main_prg_no$)
if progno$ = main_prg_no$, result = mprint(sprgnerror)
pbld, n$, «M98», *main_prg_no$, e$
prv_feed = c9k #Force feed in sub
psub_mirror #Mirror start code, user
#Mirror Y axis
if sub_trnmthd$, pbld, n$, *sgabsinc, strns_mir_on, *sub_trnsx$, e$
#Mirror X axis
else, pbld, n$, *sgabsinc, strns_mir_on, *sub_trnsy$, e$
psub_rotate #Rotate start code, user
if convert_rpd$, pconvert_rpd
pbld, n$, [if gcode$, *sgfeed], *sgcode, *sgabsinc, strns_rot_on, *sub_trnsx$, *sub_trnsy$,
[absinc$ = one], *sgabsinc, *rt_cinc, [if gcode$, *feed], e$
psub_st_m$ #Header in main level
result = nwadrs(stro, main_prg_no$)
if first_sub & subs_before, first_sub = zero #suppress blank line before first sub with subs before main
else, » «, e$
*main_prg_no$, e$
#G51/G68 requires absolute position on first move
if mr_rt_rst,
[
sav_absinc = absinc$
if absinc$ = one,
[
absinc$ = zero
prv_absinc$ = m_one
prv_xabs = m_one
prv_yabs = m_one
]
]
else, pbld, n$, sgabsinc, e$
psub_end_m$ #End in main level
n$, «M99», e$
prv_absinc$ = m_one
#Reset update variables for subs at main level
#Mirror or Rotate cancel, flagged cleared on return
if mr_rt_actv,
[
subout$ = zero
no_nc_out$ = m_one
sav_absinc = absinc$
if sub_trnstyp$ = zero,
[
#The original pattern is not cancelled
if sub_chn_no$ <> one,
[
absinc$ = zero
pbld, n$, *sgabsinc, strns_mir_off, *sub_trnsx$, *sub_trnsy$, e$
]
]
else, #Rotate
[
#The original pattern is not cancelled
if sub_trnstyp$ = one & sub_trnmthd$ = two & esub_sec_no$,
[
absinc$ = zero
pbld, n$, strns_rot_off, e$
]
]
absinc$ = sav_absinc
no_nc_out$ = zero
mr_rt_rst = zero
mr_rt_actv = zero
]
end_sub_mny = sub_mny_t$
psub_end_mny #End in main level for many tools sub, user
#Check for coming out of xform with stage tool.
if end_sub_mny & stagetool = one,
[
*t$
end_sub_mny = zero
]
psub_call_s$ #Call to sub level
result = nwadrs(strp, sub_prg_no$)
sub_prg_no$ = sub_prg_no$ + 1000 #Add sub number offset
if progno$ = sub_prg_no$, result = mprint(sprgnerror)
pbld, n$, «M98», *sub_prg_no$, e$
psub_st_s$ #Header in sub leveln
result = nwadrs(stro, sub_prg_no$)
if first_sub & subs_before, first_sub = zero #suppress blank line before first sub with subs before main
else, » «, e$
*sub_prg_no$, e$
pbld, n$, sgabsinc, e$
psub_end_s$ #End in sub level
n$, «M99», e$
prv_absinc$ = -1
#endregion
#region Canned text
# —————————————————————————
# Canned Text
# —————————————————————————
pcan #Canned text — before output call
strcantext = sblank
if cant_no$ > zero,
[
if cant_pos1$ = zero | cant_pos1$ = three, pcant_1
if cant_pos2$ = zero | cant_pos2$ = three, pcant_2
if cant_pos3$ = zero | cant_pos3$ = three, pcant_3
if cant_pos4$ = zero | cant_pos4$ = three, pcant_4
if cant_pos5$ = zero | cant_pos5$ = three, pcant_5
if cant_pos6$ = zero | cant_pos6$ = three, pcant_6
if cant_pos7$ = zero | cant_pos7$ = three, pcant_7
if cant_pos8$ = zero | cant_pos8$ = three, pcant_8
if cant_pos9$ = zero | cant_pos9$ = three, pcant_9
if cant_pos10$ = zero | cant_pos10$ = three, pcant_10
if cant_pos11$ = zero | cant_pos11$ = three, pcant_11
if cant_pos12$ = zero | cant_pos12$ = three, pcant_12
if cant_pos13$ = zero | cant_pos13$ = three, pcant_13
if cant_pos14$ = zero | cant_pos14$ = three, pcant_14
if cant_pos15$ = zero | cant_pos15$ = three, pcant_15
if cant_pos16$ = zero | cant_pos16$ = three, pcant_16
if cant_pos17$ = zero | cant_pos17$ = three, pcant_17
if cant_pos18$ = zero | cant_pos18$ = three, pcant_18
if cant_pos19$ = zero | cant_pos19$ = three, pcant_19
if cant_pos20$ = zero | cant_pos20$ = three, pcant_20
pbld, n$, strcantext, e$
strcantext = sblank
]
pcan1 #Canned text — with move
strcantext = sblank
if cant_no$ > zero,
[
if cant_pos1$ = one, pcant_1
if cant_pos2$ = one, pcant_2
if cant_pos3$ = one, pcant_3
if cant_pos4$ = one, pcant_4
if cant_pos5$ = one, pcant_5
if cant_pos6$ = one, pcant_6
if cant_pos7$ = one, pcant_7
if cant_pos8$ = one, pcant_8
if cant_pos9$ = one, pcant_9
if cant_pos10$ = one, pcant_10
if cant_pos11$ = one, pcant_11
if cant_pos12$ = one, pcant_12
if cant_pos13$ = one, pcant_13
if cant_pos14$ = one, pcant_14
if cant_pos15$ = one, pcant_15
if cant_pos16$ = one, pcant_16
if cant_pos17$ = one, pcant_17
if cant_pos18$ = one, pcant_18
if cant_pos19$ = one, pcant_19
if cant_pos20$ = one, pcant_20
]
if cstop$, strcantext = strcantext + sm00
if cgstop$, strcantext = strcantext + sm01
#Output of strcantext occurs at the end of the output line
pcan1_cool #Canned text Coolant — with move
if cant_no$ > zero,
[
if cant_pos1$ = four, pcant_1
if cant_pos2$ = four, pcant_2
if cant_pos3$ = four, pcant_3
if cant_pos4$ = four, pcant_4
if cant_pos5$ = four, pcant_5
if cant_pos6$ = four, pcant_6
if cant_pos7$ = four, pcant_7
if cant_pos8$ = four, pcant_8
if cant_pos9$ = four, pcant_9
if cant_pos10$ = four, pcant_10
if cant_pos11$ = four, pcant_11
if cant_pos12$ = four, pcant_12
if cant_pos13$ = four, pcant_13
if cant_pos14$ = four, pcant_14
if cant_pos15$ = four, pcant_15
if cant_pos16$ = four, pcant_16
if cant_pos17$ = four, pcant_17
if cant_pos18$ = four, pcant_18
if cant_pos19$ = four, pcant_19
if cant_pos20$ = four, pcant_20
]
pcan2 #Canned text — after output call
strcantext = sblank
if cant_no$ > zero,
[
if cant_pos1$ = two | cant_pos1$ = five, pcant_1
if cant_pos2$ = two | cant_pos2$ = five, pcant_2
if cant_pos3$ = two | cant_pos3$ = five, pcant_3
if cant_pos4$ = two | cant_pos4$ = five, pcant_4
if cant_pos5$ = two | cant_pos5$ = five, pcant_5
if cant_pos6$ = two | cant_pos6$ = five, pcant_6
if cant_pos7$ = two | cant_pos7$ = five, pcant_7
if cant_pos8$ = two | cant_pos8$ = five, pcant_8
if cant_pos9$ = two | cant_pos9$ = five, pcant_9
if cant_pos10$ = two | cant_pos10$ = five, pcant_10
if cant_pos11$ = two | cant_pos11$ = five, pcant_11
if cant_pos12$ = two | cant_pos12$ = five, pcant_12
if cant_pos13$ = two | cant_pos13$ = five, pcant_13
if cant_pos14$ = two | cant_pos14$ = five, pcant_14
if cant_pos15$ = two | cant_pos15$ = five, pcant_15
if cant_pos16$ = two | cant_pos16$ = five, pcant_16
if cant_pos17$ = two | cant_pos17$ = five, pcant_17
if cant_pos18$ = two | cant_pos18$ = five, pcant_18
if cant_pos19$ = two | cant_pos19$ = five, pcant_19
if cant_pos20$ = two | cant_pos20$ = five, pcant_20
pbld, n$, strcantext, e$
strcantext = sblank
]
pcant_1 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos1$
cantext$ = cant_val1$
pcant_out
pcant_2 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos2$
cantext$ = cant_val2$
pcant_out
pcant_3 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos3$
cantext$ = cant_val3$
pcant_out
pcant_4 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos4$
cantext$ = cant_val4$
pcant_out
pcant_5 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos5$
cantext$ = cant_val5$
pcant_out
pcant_6 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos6$
cantext$ = cant_val6$
pcant_out
pcant_7 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos7$
cantext$ = cant_val7$
pcant_out
pcant_8 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos8$
cantext$ = cant_val8$
pcant_out
pcant_9 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos9$
cantext$ = cant_val9$
pcant_out
pcant_10 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos10$
cantext$ = cant_val10$
pcant_out
pcant_11 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos11$
cantext$ = cant_val11$
pcant_out
pcant_12 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos12$
cantext$ = cant_val12$
pcant_out
pcant_13 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos13$
cantext$ = cant_val13$
pcant_out
pcant_14 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos14$
cantext$ = cant_val14$
pcant_out
pcant_15 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos15$
cantext$ = cant_val15$
pcant_out
pcant_16 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos16$
cantext$ = cant_val16$
pcant_out
pcant_17 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos17$
cantext$ = cant_val17$
pcant_out
pcant_18 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos18$
cantext$ = cant_val18$
pcant_out
pcant_19 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos19$
cantext$ = cant_val19$
pcant_out
pcant_20 #Canned text — output call
cant_pos = cant_pos20$
cantext$ = cant_val20$
pcant_out
pcant_out #Canned text — build the string for output
#Assign string select type outputs
if cant_pos < three, #cant_pos indicates canned text output
[
if cantext$ = three, bld = one
if cantext$ = four, bld = zero
#Build the cantext string
if cantext$ = one, strcantext = strcantext + sm00
if cantext$ = two, strcantext = strcantext + sm01
if cantext$ > four,
[
strtextno = no2str(cantext$)
strcantext = strcantext + strm + strtextno
]
]
else, #cant_pos indicates coolant output
[
coolant_bin = flook (two, cantext$) #Create binary value for each coolant using lookup table
if frac(cantext$/two), # coolant off
[
if all_cool_off,
[
if coolant_on, pbld, n$, sall_cool_off, e$
coolant_on = zero
]
else,
[
if coolant_on > 0,
[
coolant_on = coolant_on — coolant_bin/2 #Odd = off command, subtract appropriate binary value.
coolantx = cantext$ — 50 #Create a coolantx value for string select
pbld, n$, *scoolantx, e$
]
]
]
else, #Even = on command
[ #Determine if this coolant is already on
local_int = zero
coolantx = zero
suppress = zero
while local_int < 20 & coolant_on > 0,
[
result2 = and(2^local_int, coolant_on)
local_int = local_int + one
if result2 = coolant_bin, suppress = one
]
if suppress <> 1, #Don’t output an on code for a coolant that is already on
[
coolant_on = coolant_on + coolant_bin #Maintain binary sum of all coolants currently on
coolantx = cantext$ — 50 #Create a coolantx value for string select
if cant_pos = four, *scoolantx #Coolant «With»
else, pbld, n$, *scoolantx, e$ #Coolant «Before» or «After»
]
]
]
#endregion
#region Calculations
#region Position calculations
# —————————————————————————
# Position calculations, generally these do not need to be modified
# —————————————————————————
pmiscint$ #Capture the top level absinc for subprograms
if sub_level$ <= zero, absinc$ = mi2$
#Disable cutpos2 if not 4 axis, saves time
if rot_on_x = zero, cutpos2$ = m_one
pmotion_su #Motion Setup (Set brklinestype & linarc)
brklinestype$ = zero
linarc$ = zero
if rot_on_x,
[
if cuttype = one, #Axis Substitution
[
linarc$ = one #Linearize all arcs
if rev_brkflag, #Break rotation flag (set in pcoutrev)
[
brklinestype$ = 11 #Break all lines, use brklineslen$ for segment length
#brklineslen$ = pi$ * rotdia$ #Break every 360 degrees
brklineslen$ = pi$ * rotdia$ / four #Break every 90 degrees
rev_brkflag = zero #Reset flag
]
]
if cuttype = two, #Polar
[
brklinestype$ = rotary_axis$ + three
linarc$ = one
]
]
pcuttype #Determine the cut type
#cuttype (0 = Tool Plane, 1 = Axis Subs, 2 = Polar, 3 = 4/5 axis)
cuttype = rotary_type$
if cuttype = three, cuttype = zero
if mill5$, cuttype = three
if cuttype = zero & force_index, index = 1 #If tool plane positioning & force index mode
else, index = rot_index #otherwise use machine def. rotary axis setting
#Check for Tool Origin in Polar Milling
if cuttype = two & (tox$ | toy$ | toz$), result = mprint(stlorgerr)
#Avoid calling G51/G68 with additional toolchanges
if mr_rt_actv = zero,
[
#Transform Rotate, set mr_rt_actv if user selected ‘coordinates’
#Mirror is set on sub call
if sub_trnstyp$ = one & sub_trnmthd$ = two,
[
if sub_sec_no$, mr_rt_actv = two
else, mr_rt_actv = one
]
]
pfcalc_u_min
pmotion_su
pcheckaxis #Check for valid rotary axis
#If selected axis combination has more than 1 rotary axis and toolpath has rotation
if (cabs | cdelta | cuttype) & rotaxerror = 1, [if mprint(srotaxerror, 2) = 2, exitpost$]
#If machine’s defined axis of rotation does not match operations axis of rotation
# if (rotary_axis$ & (rotary_axis$ <> rot_on_x)) | (rotary_axis2 <> c9k &
# ((rotary_axis2 + 1) <> rot_on_x)), [if mprint(saxiserror, 2) = 2, exitpost$]
# rotary_axis2 = c9k
pxyzcout #Map coordinates
if rot_on_x,
[
if cuttype = zero, pxyzcout0 #Toolplane Positioning
if cuttype = one, pxyzcout1 #Axis Substitution
if cuttype = two, pxyzcout2 #Polar Conversion
if cuttype = three, pxyzcout3 #Simulatneous 4 axis (Multi-axis)
if rot_ccw_pos = one, csav = -csav
if mr_rt_actv <> two,
[
pcoutrev
if index, pindxcalc
pfcalc
]
else, feed = fr_pos$
]
else,
[
xabs = vequ(x$)
iout = vequ(i$)
feed = fr_pos$
]
pxyzcout0 #Toolplane Positioning
xabs = vequ(x$)
iout = vequ(i$)
if rot_on_x = two, csav = -c$
else, csav = c$
pxyzcout1 #Axis substitution
if rot_on_x = one, #X axis substitution
[
xabs = x$
yabs = zero
zabs = z$ + (rotdia$ / two)
csav = y$ * (360 / (pi$ * rotdia$))
]
else, #Y axis substitution
[
xabs = zero
yabs = y$
zabs = z$ + (rotdia$ / two)
csav = x$ * (360 / (pi$ * rotdia$))
]
#Reverse direction if needed
if (rot_ccw_pos = 0 & rotaxis_dir$ = 1) | (rot_ccw_pos = 1 & rotaxis_dir$ = 0), csav = -csav
pxyzcout2 #polar interpolation
#Drill polar is toolplane drilling toward center
#if not a coincident axis
#Also, Capture initial index position for Polar Milling
if (opcode$ = three & rot_on_x <> three), pxyzcout0
else,
[
if rot_on_x = one, #X axis rotation
[
csav = atan2(y$, z$) #Z+ zero
axisx$ = vequ(aaxisx)
xabs = rotp(csav, x$)
]
if rot_on_x = two, #Y axis rotation
[
csav = atan2(-x$, z$) #Z+ zero
axisx$ = vequ(baxisx)
xabs = rotp(csav, x$)
]
if rot_on_x = three, #Z axis rotation
[
csav = atan2(-y$, x$) #X+ zero
axisx$ = vequ(caxisx)
xabs = rotp(csav, x$)
]
csav = csav + c$
]
pxyzcout3 #Multisurf rotary axis motion
if rot_on_x = one, #Multisurf Rotary about X
[
csav = atan2 (vtooly$, vtoolz$)
axisx$ = vequ (aaxisx)
]
if rot_on_x = two, #Multisurf Rotary about Y
[
csav = atan2 (-vtoolx$, vtoolz$)
axisx$ = vequ (baxisx)
]
xabs = rotp (csav, x$)
u$ = rotp (csav, u$)
csav = csav + c$
#endregion
#region Rotary axis revolution / index calculations
pcoutrev #Rotary axis revolution calculation (Modify for wind-up)
cdelta = csav — prv_csav
if cuttype = one & rot_type > zero & not(index) & toolchng = zero & toolchng0 = zero, #Axis sub and signed direction or shortesat direction
[
cdelta_calc = abs(cdelta)
cdelta_calc = fmtrnd(cdelta_calc)
if cdelta_calc > 360, #Break rotary motion
[
rev_brkflag = one #Break every 90 or 360 degrees (see plin0$)
redo_proc$ #Reprocess NCI line
]
]
while abs(cdelta) > ctol, #If motion exceeds ctol, add wind-up
[
if cdelta > zero,
[
rev = rev — one
cdelta = cdelta — 360
]
else,
[
rev = rev + one
cdelta = cdelta + 360
]
]
if cuttype <> one, cabs = rev * 360 + csav
else, cabs = sav_rev * 360 + csav
!csav
if index <> 1 & rot_type > 0, #Signed absolute output or shortest direction
[
#Keep tablebetween 0 — 360
while cabs < 0 & absinc$ <> 1, cabs = cabs + 360
while cabs > 360 & absinc$ <> 1, cabs = cabs — 360
# Calc signed direction. Not sure why I need to flop indx_mc
#Phase shift delta 10 revolutions, check odd/even
if frac(int((cdelta + 3600)/180)/two), indx_mc = zero #indx_mc = one
else, indx_mc = one #indx_mc = zero
if cdelta < 0, indx_mc = zero
else, indx_mc = one
]
if rot_type = 1, pset_rot_label_sign #Set rotary axis label with sign
else, pset_rot_label #Set rotary axis label
pindxcalc #Index move calculations, direction is shortest
#Check if in tolerance when not full rotary
#ie. rotary has been defined as an indexer or force_index is yes$
if rot_index = one,
[
cdelta = frac(abs(csav)/ctable)
if cdelta > ixtol & cdelta < 1-ixtol, result = mprint(sindxerror)
]
cdelta = prvcabs — cabs
#Phase shift delta 10 revolutions, check odd/even
if frac(int((cdelta + 3600)/180)/two), indx_mc = one
else, indx_mc = zero
#Set range 0-360
indx_out = csav
while indx_out < 0, indx_out = indx_out + 360
while indx_out > 360, indx_out = indx_out — 360
if rot_type = 1, pset_rot_label_sign #Set rotary axis label
else, pset_rot_label
#endregion
#region Set rotary axis label and sign
pset_rot_label #Set rotary axis label
if not(use_md_rot_label),
[
if rot_on_x = 1, srot_label = srot_x #Rotating about X axis
if rot_on_x = 2, srot_label = srot_y #Rotating about Y axis
if rot_on_x = 3,
[
if vmc, srot_label = srot_z #Rotating about Z axis — vertical machine
else, srot_label = srot_y #Rotating about Y axis — horizontal machine
]
]
result = nwadrs(srot_label, cabs)
result = nwadrs(srot_label, cinc)
result = nwadrs(srot_label, indx_out)
pset_rot_label_sign #Set rotary axis label for signed output direction
if use_md_rot_label,
[
if not(use_rotmcode),
[
if indx_mc = zero, srot_label = srot_label + sminus
else, srot_label = sav_srot_label
]
]
else,
[
if not(use_rotmcode),
[
if rot_on_x = 1, srot_label = srot_x #Rotating about X axis
if rot_on_x = 2, srot_label = srot_y #Rotating about Y axis
if rot_on_x = 3, srot_label = srot_z #Rotating about Z axis
if indx_mc = zero, srot_label = srot_label + sminus
]
]
result = nwadrs(srot_label, cabs)
result = nwadrs(srot_label, cinc)
result = nwadrs(srot_label, indx_out)
#endregion
#region Feedrate calculations
#Feedrate calculations
pconvert_rpd #Convert rapid motion to linear motion at maximum feedrate when selected in CD
gcode$ = one
feed = pst_rpd_fr$
ipr_type = zero
pfcalc #Feedrate calculations, gcode 0 does not evaluate
if gcode$ <> zero,
[
if fmtrnd(cabs) = prvcabs | index, pfcalc_u_min
else,
[
if (cuttype = one & (cutpos2$ <= one | cutpos2$ = four)) | rotfeed4$ = 0,
pfcalc_u_min
else, pfclc_deg_inv
]
if ipr_type <> prv_ipr_type, prv_feed = c9k
]
pfcalc_u_min #Feedrate unit/min
ipr_type = zero
feed = fr_pos$
if feed > maxfeedpm, feed = maxfeedpm
prvfrdeg = feed
pfclc_deg_inv #Feedrate deg/min
circum = zabs * two * pi$
if circum = zero, circum = c9k #Don’t allow Zero
ldelta = sqrt((xabs-prv_xabs)^2+(yabs-prv_yabs)^2+(zabs-prv_zabs)^2)
cdelta = ((abs(cabs — prvcabs))/360)*circum
if ldelta = zero, cldelta = cdelta
else, cldelta = sqrt(cdelta^two + ldelta^two)
if cldelta = zero, cldelta = c9k
#Set rotary feedrate type from CD variable
if rotfeed4$ = 2, use_frinv = yes$ #Use inverse time feedrate is set in CD
else, use_frinv = no$ #Or not…
if use_frinv,
[
#Feedrate inverse calculation
ipr_type = two
prv_feed = c9k #Always force feed
if cuttype = three, cldelta = sqrt((x$-prv_x$)^2+(y$-prv_y$)^2+(z$-prv_z$)^2)
if inversefeed$, #Feedrate in seconds
[
frinv = (fr_pos$*(1/60))/cldelta
if frinv > (maxfrinv/60), frinv = (maxfrinv/60)
]
else, #Feedrate in minutes
[
frinv = fr_pos$/cldelta
if frinv > maxfrinv, frinv = maxfrinv
]
feed = frinv
]
else,
[
#Feedrate deg/min control and calculation
ipr_type = zero #Change to ipr_type = one to force new DPM
frdeg = abs(cdelta/cldelta) * abs(fr_pos$ * (360/circum))
if abs(frdeg — prvfrdeg) > frdegstp | ipr_type <> prv_ipr_type,
[
#Control output of frdeg
prvfrdeg = frdeg
feed = frdeg
]
if frdeg > maxfrdeg, feed = maxfrdeg
]
#endregion
#region Incremental calculations
#Incremental calculations
ps_inc_calc #Incremental calculations, start
xia = fmtrnd(xabs)
yia = fmtrnd(yabs)
zia = fmtrnd(zabs)
xinc = vsub (xia, prv_xia)
ps_cinc_calc
ps_cinc_calc #Incremental calculations, start rotary
cia = fmtrnd(cabs)
cinc = cia — prv_cia
pe_inc_calc #Incremental calculations, end
prvcabs = fmtrnd(cabs) #Avoid updating until called explicitly
!xia, !yia, !zia, !cia
!x$, !y$, !z$, !cc_pos$, !cutpos2$
#endregion
#end of Calculations region
#endregion
#region Parameter read postblocks, parameter tables
# —————————————————————————
# Parameter read postblocks:
# —————————————————————————
pprep$ #Pre-process postblock — Allows post instructions after the post is parsed but before the NC and NCI file are opened.
#DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OUTPUT TO THE NC FILE IN THIS POSTBLOCK (OR ANY POSTBLOCKS YOU MAY CALL FROM HERE) BECAUSE THE NC OUTPUT FILE IS NOT YET OPENED!
sav_index = index #Save original index value
rd_cd$ #Read CD Parameters
rd_mch_ent_no$ = 0 #Read only the machine base parameters (use to collect common parameters from CNC_MACHINE_TYPE)
rd_md$ #Read machine definition parameters
psynclath$ #Read NCI Axis-Combination (950) line
pset_mach #Set rotary switches by reading machine def parameters
#Rotaxtyp = 1 sets initial matrix to top
#Rotaxtyp = -2 sets initial matrix to front
if vmc, rotaxtyp$ = one
else, rotaxtyp$ = -2
pwrtt$ #Pre-read NCI file
if tool_info > 1 & t$ > 0 & gcode$ <> 1003, ptooltable
pwrttparam$ #Pre-read parameter data
#»pwrttparam», ~prmcode$, ~sparameter$, e$
if prmcode$ = 15346, comp_type = rpar(sparameter$, 1) #Cutter compensation type — 0=computer, 1=control, 2=wear, 3=reverse wear, 4=off
if prmcode$ = 10010, xy_stock = rpar(sparameter$, 1) #Capture stock to leave (XY)
if prmcode$ = 10068, z_stock = rpar(sparameter$, 1) #Capture stock to leave (Z)
pparameter$ #Read operation parameters
#rd_params is used to call pparameter postblock and read the parameters of the operation specified in rd_param_op_no
#»pparameter», ~prmcode$, ~sparameter$, e$
if prmcode$ = 12025, rotary_axis2 = rpar(sparameter$, 1) #Capture the axis of rotation in Multiaxis Drill and Curve 5 Axis
# Check To See if tool is metric
if prmcode$ = 20007, toolismetric = rparsngl(sparameter$, 11)
# —————————————————————————
# Parameter lookup tables — You must adjust the size value if you add any parameters to these tables!
# —————————————————————————
# Machine Definition Parameters
fprmtbl 17000 14 #Table Number, Size
# Param Variable to load value into
17391 axis_label #Axis label — 1=X,2=Y,3=Z
17397 srot_label #Rotary Axis label (Generally A, B or C) — Not yet available.
17401 rot_zero #Rotary zero degree position
17402 rot_dir #Rotary direction
17408 rot_index #Index or continuous
17409 rot_angle #Index step
17410 rot_type #Rotary type
17605 min_speed #Minimum spindle speed
17058 maxfrinv #Maximum feedrate — inverse time — inch — Minimum value from MD as this is inverse time
17066 maxfrinv_m #Maximum feedrate — inverse time — metric — Minimum value from MD as this is inverse time
17992 maxfrdeg #Maximum feedrate deg/min
17055 maxfeedpm #Limit for feed in inch/min
17063 maxfeedpm_m #Limit for feed in mm/min
17101 all_cool_off #First coolant off command shuts off ALL coolant options
# Control Definition Parameters
fprmtbl 18000 1 #Table Number, Size
# Param Variable to load value into
18713 subs_before #Subprograms output before or after main program
# Toolpath Group Parameters
fprmtbl 19000 0 #Table Number, Size
# Param Variable to load value into
# —————————————————————————
pset_mach #Set post switches by reading machine def parameters
rot_ax_cnt = 0
rotaxerror = 0
rot_axis = 0 #Turn off rotary axis unless it is detected in machine read — supresses rotary output in 3 axis machines
#maxfeedpm = 999999 #Uncomment these variables to force use of machine def values as initial lowest max feedrate value
#maxfeedpm_m = 9999999 #Otherwise the default (post) initialization setting is used as initial value
!maxfeedpm, !maxfeedpm_m
rd_mch_ent_no$ = syncaxis$ #Retrieve machine parameters based on current axis combination — read from .nci G950 line
if read_md = yes$, rd_md$ #Read machine definition parameters — calls pmachineinfo$
#We only need these set at toolchange (and start of file). No need to set them each time a user may call rd_md
if read_md = yes$, #Override initial post values if reading Machine Definition
[
rot_on_x = rot_axis
rot_ccw_pos = rot_dir
index = rot_index
if rot_angle = zero, ctable = one #ctable zero will produce a divide by zero error, so force to one if zero in MD
else, ctable = rot_angle
if not(vmc) & rot_on_x = 3, rot_on_x = 2 #If HMC and rotating about world Z axis (machine Y axis)
]
else, rot_index = sav_index
if met_tool$ = 1,
[
maxfrinv = maxfrinv_m #Set limit for feed inverse time
maxfeedpm = maxfeedpm_m #Set limit for feed in mm/min
]
sav_srot_label = srot_label #Backup the original rotary axis label
# —————————————————————————
# Machine definition and control definition parameter capture:
# —————————————————————————
pmachineinfo$ #Machine information parameters postblock
#rd_md is used to call pmachineinfo postblock and read the parameters of the selected axis
#combination machine entity set in rd_mch_ent_no
#rd_cd is used to call pmachineinfo postblock and read the active control definition parameters
#rd_tlpathgrp is used to call pmachineinfo postblock and read the active toolpath group parameters
#»—>pmachineinfo», ~prmcode$, » «, ~sparameter$, e$ #Do not uncomment if being called from pprep$ — see pprep comment
#Read parameter lookup tables —
if prmcode$ >= 17000 & prmcode$ < 18000, result = fprm(17000) #Run the parameter table for Machine Definition Parameters
if prmcode$ >= 18000 & prmcode$ < 19000, result = fprm(18000) #Run the parameter table for Control Definition Parameters
#Leave line below commented until you enter values in related lookup tables
#if prmcode$ >= 19000 & prmcode$ < 19900, result = fprm(19000) #Run the parameter table for Toolpath Group Parameters
#Count rotary axis and output error message if more than one is found in the active axis combination and read_md = yes$
if prmcode$ = 19958,
[
component_type = rpar(sparameter$, 1) #Component type
if component_type = 5 & read_md = yes$,
[
rot_ax_cnt = rot_ax_cnt + 1 #Rotary component
if rot_ax_cnt = 2, rotaxerror = rotaxerror + 1 #Post only supports 1 rotary per axis combination
]
]
#Determine Z direction — set vmc
if prmcode$ = 17392 & axis_label = 3,
[
z_dir = rpar(sparameter$, 1) #Z axis direction — +X=1,+Y=2,+Z=3,-X=7,-Y=8,-Z=9
if z_dir <> 3 & z_dir <> 9, vmc = 0 #0 = Horizontal Machine, 1 = Vertical Mill
else, vmc = 1
]
#Set axis of rotation for rotary component
if prmcode$ = 17399,
[
rot_axis = rpar(sparameter$, 1) #Axis of rotation — +X=1,+Y=2,+Z=3,-X=7,-Y=8,-Z=9
if rot_axis > 3, rot_axis = rot_axis — 6 #Keep value positive (+X,+Y,+Z) for use in rot_on_x
]
#Read Linear Axis parameters — capture lowest feedrate value of all linear axis
if maxfeedpm > prv_maxfeedpm, maxfeedpm = prv_maxfeedpm
if maxfeedpm_m > prv_maxfeedpm_m, maxfeedpm_m = prv_maxfeedpm_m
!maxfeedpm, !maxfeedpm_m
#endregion
#region Post text
# Do not add an #endregion tag — or any other #region tags — below this line.
# —————————————————————————
# POST TEXT
# —————————————————————————
[CTRL_MILL|MPFAN]
[misc integers]
1. «Work Coordinates [0-1=G92, 2=G54’s]»//2
2. «Absolute/Incremental, top level [0=ABS, 1=INC]»
3. «Reference Return [0=G28, 1=G30]»
[simple drill]
1. «Drill/Counterbore»
7. «»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[peck drill]
3. «»
7. «Peck»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[chip break]
3. «»
7. «Peck»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[tap]
3. «»
7. «»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[bore1]
1. «Bore #1 (feed-out)»
7. «»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[bore2]
1. «Bore #2 (stop spindle, rapid out)»
3. «»
7. «»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[misc1]
1. «Fine Bore (shift)»
7. «»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
[misc2]
1. «Rigid Tapping Cycle»
3. «»
7. «»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[drill cycle descriptions]
7. «Fine bore (shift)»
8. «Rigid Tapping Cycle»
[canned text]
1. «Stop»
2. «Ostop»
3. «Bld on»
4. «bLd off»
5. «M5»
6. «M6»
7. «M7»
8. «M8»
9. «M9»
10. «M10»
[CTRL_MILL|DEFAULT]
[misc integers]
1. «Work Coordinates [0-1=G92, 2=G54’s]»//2
2. «Absolute/Incremental, top level [0=ABS, 1=INC]»
3. «Reference Return [0=G28, 1=G30]»
[simple drill]
1. «Drill/Counterbore»
7. «»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[peck drill]
3. «»
7. «Peck»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[chip break]
3. «»
7. «Peck»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[tap]
3. «»
7. «»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[bore1]
1. «Bore #1 (feed-out)»
7. «»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[bore2]
1. «Bore #2 (stop spindle, rapid out)»
3. «»
7. «»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[misc1]
1. «Fine Bore (shift)»
7. «»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
[misc2]
1. «Rigid Tapping Cycle»
3. «»
7. «»
8. «»
9. «»
10. «»
11. «»
[drill cycle descriptions]
7. «Fine bore (shift)»
8. «Rigid Tapping Cycle»
[canned text]
1. «Stop»
2. «Ostop»
3. «Bld on»
4. «bLd off»
5. «M5»
6. «M6»
7. «M7»
8. «M8»
9. «M9»
10. «M10»
[CTRL_TEXT_END]
Events specification
BOC Gen Lx <V
(where x=1,2,3)
BOC Gen V Unbal
BOC Gen >, <Freq
Gen CCW Rot
BOC Amps Unbal
BOC Amps IDMT
BOC Overload
BOC Short Crct
Sd Earth Fault
Sd Overspeed
Sd Underspeed
Mains Lx >V
Mains Lx <V
(where x=1,2,3)
Mains V Unbal
Mains >, <Freq
Mains CCW Rot
Wrn MainsV Det
EmergencyStop
Sd Override
GCB Fail
MCB Fail
Sd RPMMeasFail
NT
– AMF20/25, SW version 2.2, ©ComAp – September 2014
InteliLite
IL-NT-AMF-2.2-Reference Guide.pdf
Information on binary
Protection
output available (See
type
list of
Binary
BOC
BOC
YES
BOC
YES
WRN
NO
BOC
NO
BOC
NO
BOC
YES
BOC
YES
SD
YES
SD
YES
SD
YES
MF
YES
MF
YES
MF
YES
WRN
NO
NONE
NO
SD
NO
WRN
NO
SD
NO
MF
NO
SD
NO
Description
outputs)
given by Gen <V BOC and Gen >V Sd
setpoints.
The generator voltage is unbalanced
more than the value of Volt Unbal
BOC setpoint.
The generator frequency is out of
limits given by Gen >Freq BOC and
Gen <Freq BOC setpoints.
Genset voltage phases are not wired
correctly. MCB closing is prohibited by
controller.
The generator current is unbalanced.
Generator current exceeds the limit
for IDMT protection given by Nominal
current and Amps IDMT Del setpoints.
The load is greater than the value
given by Overload BOC setpoint.
Generator current is higher than the
value given by Short Crct BOC
setpoint.
This alarm is activated when Earth
Fault value exceeds Earth Fault Sd
limit for at least Earth Fault Del period.
The protection comes active if the
speed is greater than Overspeed
setpoint.
During starting of the engine when the
RPM reach the value of Starting RPM
setpoint the starter is switched off and
the speed of the engine can drop
under Starting RPM again. Then the
Underspeed protection becomes
active. Protection evaluation starts 5
seconds after reaching StartingRPM.
The mains voltage is out of limits
given by Mains <V and Mains >V
setpoints.
The mains voltage is unbalanced
more than the value of Mains VUnbal
setpoint.
The mains frequency is out of limits
given by Mains >Freq and Mains
<Freq setpoints.
Mains voltage phases are not wired
correctly. MCB closing is prohibited by
controller.
AMF controller in MRS mode detects
a voltage on mains connector.
If the input Emergency Stop is opened
shutdown is immediately activated.
The protection is active if the output
Sd Override is closed.
Failure of generator circuit breaker.
Failure of mains circuit breaker.
Failure of magnetic pick-up sensor for
111
Copyright © 2012 ComAp s.r.o. Written by Petr Novák Prague, Czech Republic
ComAp, spol. s r.o. Kundratka 2359/17, 180 00 Praha 8, Czech Republic Tel: +420 246 012 111, Fax: +420 2 66316647 E-mail: [email protected], www.comap.cz
Reference Guide
InteliLiteNT
InteliLite NT MRS
Modular Gen-set Controller
Compact Controller for Single Operating Gen-sets
(IL-NT MRS10/11/15/16 unit)
SW version 2.0, June 2012
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 2 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Table of Contents
Table of Contents …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 2 General Guidelines …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 5
What describes this manual? ……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5 !! Warnings !! ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5 Symbols …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 5 Text ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6 Dangerous voltage ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6 Adjust set points …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 6
General Description ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 7 Description of the controller system (with all options) ………………………………………………………………. 7 What is in the package? ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 7 IL-NT RS232 Communication plug-in card …………………………………………………………………………….. 7 IL-NT RS232-485 Communication plug-in card …………………………………………………………………….. 11 IL-NT S-USB Service USB communication plug-in card ………………………………………………………… 12 IB-Lite Ethernet communication plug-in card ………………………………………………………………………… 12 IL-NT-GPRS GSM and GPRS plug-in modem ……………………………………………………………………… 13 IL-NT AOUT8 Gauge driver module…………………………………………………………………………………….. 14 IL-NT BIO8 Hybrid binary input/output module ……………………………………………………………………… 16 IL-NT-EFCPM…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 17 IC-NT CT-BIO7…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 17 IL-NT RD Remote display software……………………………………………………………………………………… 18 Remote announciator IGL — RA15 ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 18 IG IOM/PTM module …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 19 IG-IB Internet bridge ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 20
IL-NT Terminals ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 21 IL-NT terminals and face ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 21
Installation……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 22 Mounting ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 22
Recommended Wiring …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 23 MRS – Wiring Diagram ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 23
Getting Started …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 24 How to install ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 24 Current measurement ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 27 Earth Fault measurement (module) …………………………………………………………………………………….. 29 Voltage measurement and generator connection types …………………………………………………………. 31 Analog inputs……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 34 Binary inputs and outputs …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 41 Recommended CAN/RS485 connection ………………………………………………………………………………. 41 Extension modules (CAN bus) connection …………………………………………………………………………… 43
Inputs and Outputs ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 45 Binary inputs IL-NT — default ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 45 Binary inputs – list …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 45 Binary outputs IL-NT MRS16 — default ………………………………………………………………………………… 48 Binary outputs — list ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 48 Analog inputs……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 57 Analog outputs …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 58
Setpoints ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 59 Password …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 59 Basic Settings…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 59 Comms Settings ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 63 Engine Params …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 66 Engine Protect ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 70 Gener Protect …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 71 *Extension I/O ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 74 Date/Time ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 75
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 3 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Sensors spec……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 76 SMS/E-Mail ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 76 Alternate Cfg ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 78 *EarthFaultProt …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 79
*ECU-controlled engine support ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 81 Identifying configured ECU ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 82 Values read from ECU ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 83 Diagnostic messages read from ECU ………………………………………………………………………………….. 83 Analog inputs……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 83 Connection description ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 84
Sensor Specification ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 87 Background of the sensor calibration …………………………………………………………………………………… 87 Default sensor curves ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 87
Function Description ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 88 OFF Mode ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 88 MAN Mode ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 88 AUT mode ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 89
Alarm Management ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 90 Sensor Fail (FLS) …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 90 Warning (WRN) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 90 Breaker open and cooling (BOC) ………………………………………………………………………………………… 90 Shut down (SD) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 91 Voltage phase sequence detection ……………………………………………………………………………………… 91
Gen-set Operation States ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 93 List of possible events ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 95 History file ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 96
Init Screens ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 99 Customer Logo screen ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 99 Firmware Init screen ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 99 Language screen ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 99 User Interface screen ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 99
Remote Control and Data Logging ………………………………………………………………………………………… 100 Direct connection to the PC ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 100 PC software — LiteEdit ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 101 Modbus protocol ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 101
Remote Communication ………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 107 Internet connection ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 107 SNMP connection …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 107 Recommended ISDN modem …………………………………………………………………………………………… 107 Recommended GSM modem ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 107 Mobile SIM card setting ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 108 Short guide how to start using IL-NT-GPRS module ……………………………………………………………. 108
IL-NT-RD Remote display software ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 111 General description …………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 111 Warning ! ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 111 IL-NT-RD Software installation ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 111 IL-NT-RD Wiring ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 112 Function description ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 115 SW compatibility ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 115
Maintenance ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 116 Backup battery replacement …………………………………………………………………………………………….. 116
Technical Data ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 118 Inputs/Outputs overview …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 118 Generator protections ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 118 Language support …………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 119 Power supply ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 119 Operating conditions ……………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 119 #Low Temperature modification ………………………………………………………………………………………… 119
Dimensions and weight ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 120 Generator ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 120
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 4 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Binary inputs and outputs …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 120 Analog inputs………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 121 Speed pick-up input ………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 121 D+ Terminal ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 121 *CAN bus interface ………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 121 IL-NT RS232 interface (optional card) ……………………………………………………………………………….. 122 IL-NT RS232-485 interface (optional card) …………………………………………………………………………. 122 IL-NT S-USB interface (optional card) ……………………………………………………………………………….. 122 IL-NT AOUT8 interface (optional card) ………………………………………………………………………………. 123 IL-NT-EFCPM interface (optional card) ……………………………………………………………………………… 123 IC-NT CT-BIO7 interface (optional card) ……………………………………………………………………………. 123 IL-NT BIO8 interface (optional card) ………………………………………………………………………………….. 124 IGS-PTM ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 124 IGL-RA15 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 124 IG-IB ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 125
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 5 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
General Guidelines
What describes this manual?
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTION — This manual contains important instructions for IL-NT
controllers family that shall be followed during installation and maintenance of the Inteli NT genset controllers. It is intended for use by gen-set control panel builders and for everybody who is concerned with installation, operation and maintenance of the gen-set. This manual describes „MRS 10/11/15/16“ software, which is designed for single set applications. What is the purpose of the manual? This manual provides general information how to install and operate InteliLite-NT MRS controller. This manual is dedicated for
Operators of gen-sets Gen-set control panel builders For everybody who is concerned with installation, operation and maintenance of the gen-set
!! Warnings !!
Remote control
InteliLiteNT
controller can be remotely controlled. In case of the work on the gen-set check, that nobody can remotely start the engine. To be sure:
Disconnect remote control via RS232 line Disconnect input REM START/STOP
or Disconnect output STARTER and outputs GCB CLOSE/OPEN
Because of large variety of InteliLite
NT parameters settings, it is not possible to describe any
combination. Some of InteliLiteNT
functions are subject of changes depend on SW version. The data in this manual only describes the product and are not warranty of performance or characteristic.
InteliLite controller SW and HW versions compatibility
Be aware that IL-NT SW version 1.2.1 and older is not possible to use with IL-NT HW version 1.3 and newer!!! Software IL-NT 1.3 is compatible with IL-NT hardware version 1.3 and older.
Symbols
Symbols used in this manual:
Grounding point symbol
AC voltage symbol
DC voltage symbol
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 6 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Text
PAGE (Capital letters in the frame) buttons on the front panel
Break Return (Italic) set points Generator protections (Bold) Set point group REMOTE START/STOP (Capital letters) binary inputs and outputs *Something (Symbol * before text) valid only for IL-NT MRS15/16 ^Something (Symbol ^ before text) valid only for IL-NT MRS11/16
Note: ComAp believes that all information provided herein is correct and reliable and reserves the right to update at any time. ComAp does not assume any responsibility for its use unless otherwise expressly undertaken.
Note:
SW and HW must be compatible (e.g. IL-NT-MRS10 firmware and IL-NT MRS10 HW) otherwise the function wil be disabled. If wrong software is downloaded, message HARDWARE INCOMPATIBLE appears on controller screen. In this case download correct software and use Boot jumper programming – close Boot jumper and follow instructions in LiteEdit or follow video guide “Boot Jumper Programming“ at http://www.comap.cz/support/training/training-videos/.
!!! CAUTION !!!
Dangerous voltage
In no case touch the terminals for voltage and current measurement! Always connect grounding terminals! In any case do not disconnect InteliLite
NT CT terminals !
Adjust set points
All parameters are preadjusted to their typical values. But the set points in the “Basic Settings” settings group !!must!! be adjusted before the first startup of the gen-set.
!!! WRONG ADJUSTMENT OF BASIC PARAMETERS CAN DESTROY THE GEN-SET !!!
The following instructions are for qualified personnel only. To avoid personal injury do
not perform any action not specified in this User guide !!!
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 7 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
General Description
Description of the controller system (with all options)
InteliLiteNT
-MRS is a comprehensive controller for single generating sets. IL-NT MRS 15/16 features extended support of electronic engines and extension modules. InteliLite
NT controllers are equipped with a powerful graphic display showing icons, symbols and bar-
graphs for intuitive operation, which sets, together with high functionality, new standards in Gen-set controls. InteliLite automatically starts the Gen-set, closes the Gen-set C.B. when all conditions are met, then stops the engine on external signal or by pressing push buttons. InteliLite
NT provides gas engine support without ventilation.
The key feature of InteliLiteNT
is its easy-to-use operation and installation. Predefined configurations for typical applications are available as well as user-defined configurations for special applications.
What is in the package?
*Remote display for IL-NT controllers uses standard IL-NT controller with Remote display software Hint: For detailed information about extension modules used with IL-NT controllers, please see the IL-NT-Accessory Modules manual.
IL-NT RS232 Communication plug-in card
IL-NT RS232 is optional plug-in card to enable InteliLite
NT for RS232 communication. This is required
for computer or Modbus connectin. Card inserts into expansion slot back on the controller. To insert the module, you must open the cover first (use screwdriver to open) and then insert the module into slot. Once you have insert it, the module will snap under plastic teeth. It is supposed to be
Accessories Description Optional / Obligatory
IL-NT MRS InteliLiteNT
central unit Obligatory
IL-NT-RS232 RS232 communication card Optional for MRS
IL-NT-RS232-485 RS232 and RS485 communication card Optional for MRS
IL-NT-S-USB Service USB communication card Optional for MRS
IB-Lite Ethernet communication card Optional for MRS
IL-NT-GPRS GSM/GPRS modem card Optional for MRS
IL-NT-AOUT8 Gauge driver plug-in card Optional for MRS
IL-NT-BIO8 Configurable I/O plug-in card Optional for MRS
IC-NT-CT-BIO7 Configurable I/O plug-in card with earth fault current measurement
Optional for MRS 15/16
IL-NT-EFCPM Earth fault current protection module Optional for MRS 15/16
**IL-NT RD Remote display software Optional for MRS
IGL-RA15 Remote annunciator Optional for MRS 15/16
IG-IOM/PTM I/O extension module Optional for MRS 15/16
IG-IB Internet communication bridge Optional for MRS
AT-LINK-CONV Service programming RS232 interface Optional for MRS
AT-LINK-CABLE Serial RS232 communication cable 1,8m Optional for MRS
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 8 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
installed permanently. Should you need to remove it, the safest way is to remove whole back cover and than remove module manually. How to install RS232 communication module:
1. Insert a screwdriver into the slot of the cover.
2. Move the screwdriver to set apart the small cover. Be careful!
3. Remove the small cover.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 9 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
4. Break apart the small cover into two pieces. Do not throw away the smaller part!
5. Take RS 232 communication module.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 10 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
6. Plug RS 232 communication module into the slot of the controller. 7. Put back the small cover.
Hint: When you insert RS 232 communication module, the boot jumper is hidden. For that reason we recommend to use RS 232 communication module with the boot jumper placed on it. See pictures below:
RS 232 communication module with the boot jumper.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 11 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Hint: Boot jumper programming – In case of interrupted programming or other software failure is possible to use the boot jumper programing to restore controller to working order. Connect controller to PC, run LiteEdit and wait until connection bar at bottom turns red. Than run programming process via menu Controller -> Programming and cloning – Programming. Select correct firmware and confirm dialog. Than follow instructions in LiteEdit. Or follow video guide “Boot Jumper Programming“ at http://www.comap.cz/support/training/training-videos/. — Please see chapter IL-NT RS232 interface (optional card) for technical details.
IL-NT RS232-485 Communication plug-in card
IL-NT RS232-485 is optional plug-in card to enable InteliLite
NT the RS232 and RS485 communication.
This is required for computer or Modbus connection. Card inserts into expansion slot back on the controller. The IL-NT RS232-485 is a dual port module with RS232 and RS485 interfaces at independent COM channels. The RS232 is connected to COM1 and RS485 to COM2. To insert the module, please follow the instructions for IL-NT RS232 module, procedure is analogous. You must open the cover first (use screwdriver to open) and then insert the module into slot. Once you have insert it, the module will snap under plastic teeth. It is supposed to be installed permanently. Should you need to remove it, the safest way is to remove whole back cover and than remove module manually.
Hint: — Boot jumper programming – In case of interrupted programming or other software failure is possible to use the boot jumper programing to restore controller to working order. Connect controller to PC, run LiteEdit and wait until connection bar at bottom turns red. Than run programming process via menu Controller -> Programming and cloning – Programming. Select correct firmware and confirm dialog. Than follow instructions in LiteEdit. Or follow video guide “Boot Jumper Programming“ at http://www.comap.cz/support/training/training-videos/. — Please see chapter IL-NT RS232-485 interface (optional card) for technical details.
RS485 RS232
Boot jumper RS485 Terminator jumper
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 12 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
IL-NT S-USB Service USB communication plug-in card
IL-NT S-USB is optional plug-in card to enable InteliLite
NT for communication via USB port. This is
required for computer or Modbus connecting. Card inserts into expansion slot back on the controller. To insert the module, you must open the cover first (use screwdriver to open) and then insert the module into slot. Once you have inserted it, part of the module will remain over plastic box. It is supposed to be used as a service tool. When you need to remove it, grab module in cutouts and pull it up manually.
Hint:
— Use the shielded USB A-B cable with this module! Recommended is ComAp cable – Order code: “USB-LINK CABLE 1.8M”.
— Please see chapter IL-NT S-USB interface (optional card) for technical details. Hint: Boot jumper programming – In case of interrupted programming or other software failure is possible to use the boot jumper programing to restore controller to working order. Connect controller to PC, run LiteEdit and wait until connection bar at bottom turns red. Than run programming process via menu Controller -> Programming and cloning – Programming. Select correct firmware and confirm dialog. Than follow instructions in LiteEdit. Or follow video guide “Boot Jumper Programming“ at http://www.comap.cz/support/training/training-videos/.
IB-Lite Ethernet communication plug-in card
IB-Lite is a plug-in card with Ethernet 10/100 Mbit interface in RJ45 connector. The card is internally connected to both COM1 and COM2 serial channels and provides an interface for connecting a PC with LiteEdit or InteliMonitor through ethernet/internet network, for sending active e-mails and for integration of the controller into a building management (Modbus TCP protocol). This card also enables to monitor and control the genset over web browser from any location with internet access using appropriate security measures. Card inserts into expansion slot back on the controller. To insert the module, please follow the instructions for IL-NT RS232 module, procedure is analogous.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 13 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Use Ethernet UTP cable with RJ45 connector for connection of the module into your ethernet network. The module can be also connected directly to a PC using cross-wired UTP cable.
Hint:
— Modbus TCP protocol using IB-Lite communication module requires setting COM1 Mode = DIRECT and COM2 Mode = MODBUS.
— Connection to LiteEdit via IP address is not possible if AirGate function is enabled. In this case use Airgate connection. If you require connection using IP address, kindly disable setpoint “Airgate [ENABLE, DISABLE]”.
— For details see newest version of IB-Lite Reference Guide.
IL-NT-GPRS GSM and GPRS plug-in modem
CAUTION!: Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power supply to both controller and module. Power supply shall be switched on also is same time to both module and controller. Fail to follow these instructions (power supply active only in controller or only in module) can lead to module or controller failure!
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 14 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
IL-NT-GPRS is a modem plug-in module which support GPRS internet connection and also dial up connection. This module incorporates support of AirGate technology for plug and play connection via GPRS. Module is usually used for connection to remote monitoring and controlling system WebSupervisor (http://websupervisor.comap.cz) or to LiteEdit PC software. Module is capable of sending alarm SMS based on settings in SMS/Email setpoint group. Hint: Quick guide how to start using this module is in chapter Remote Communication — Short guide how to start using IL-NT-GPRS module or on ComAp webpage http://www.comap.cz/products/detail/IL-NT-GPRS.
IL-NT AOUT8 Gauge driver module
IL-NT AOUT8 is optional plug-in card. Through this card controller can drive up to 8 VDO style industrial/automotive gauges. Noncompensated gauges like 0-10V or 0-20mA are not supported. Gauge type and value are configured in LiteEdit software. Any analog value from controller may be shown in that way. To insert the module, you must open the cover first (use screwdriver to open) and then insert the module into slot. Once you have insert it, the module will snap under plastic teeth. It is supposed to be installed permanently. Should you need to remove it, the safest way is to remove whole back cover and than remove module manually. Installing IL-NT AOUT8 module is similar to installing RS 232 module. The difference is that module fits to “extension module” slot and after installing IL-NT AOUT8 you do not put back the small cover. PC Installation Suite consist a set of prepared converting curves for basic usage of PWM outputs with automotove gauges.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 15 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Installing IL-NT AOUT8 module is similar to installing RS 232 module. The difference is that module fits to “extension module” slot and after installing IL-NT AOUT8 you do not put back the small cover. IL-NT AOUT8 module:
Typical wiring
Hint: Please see chapter IL-NT AOUT8 interface (optional card) for technical details.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 16 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
IL-NT BIO8 Hybrid binary input/output module
IL-NT BIO8 is optional plug-in card. Through this card controller can accommodate up to 8 binary inputs or outputs. In LiteEdit configuration is possible to easily choose if particular I/O will be binary input or output. To insert the module, you must open the cover first (use screwdriver to open) and then insert the module into slot. Once you have insert it, the module will snap under plastic teeth. It is supposed to be installed permanently. Should you need to remove it, the safest way is to remove whole back cover and than remove module manually. Installing IL-NT BIO8 module is similar to installing RS 232 module. The difference is that module fits to “extension module” slot and after installing IL-NT AOUT8 you do not put back the small cover.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 17 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Hint: Please see chapter IL-NT BIO8 interface (optional card) for technical details.
IL-NT-EFCPM
The IL-NT-EFCPM (Earth Fault Current Protection Module) is designed as extension unit for IL-NT controller, connected in EXTENSION MODULE slot. This unit checks any leakage of current towards earth (Earth Fault protection). To insert the module, you must open the cover first (use screwdriver to open) and then insert the module into slot. Once you have insert it, the module will snap under plastic teeth. It is supposed to be installed permanently. Should you need to remove it, the safest way is to remove whole back cover and than remove module manually. Installing IL-NT-EFCPM module is similar to installing RS 232 module. The difference is that module fits to “extension module” slot and after installing IL-NT-EFCPM you do not put back the small cover.
Hint: See more details in Earth Fault measurement or in IL-NT EFCPM interface chapter.
IC-NT CT-BIO7
Hybrid current input and binary input/output module
IC-NT CT-BIO7 is optional plug-in card. Through this card controller can accommodate one AC current (CT) measuring input and up to 7 binary inputs or outputs. In LiteEdit PC configuration tool (version 4.4 and higher) it is possible to easily choose if particular I/O will be binary input or output.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 18 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
To insert the module, you must open the cover first (use screwdriver to open) and then insert the module into slot. Once you have inserted it, the module will snap under plastic teeth. It is supposed to be installed permanently. Should you need to remove it, the safest way is to remove whole back cover and than remove module manually. Installing IC-NT CT-BIO7 module is similar to installing RS 232 module. The difference is that module fits to “extension module” slot and after installing IC-NT CT-BIO7 you do not put back the small cover.
Hint: See more details in Earth Fault measurement or in IC-NT CT-BIO7 interface chapter.
IL-NT RD Remote display software
IL-NT RD is remote display software for a controller. Remote display provides the same control and monitoring functions as controller itself. Remote display for IL-NT controllers uses standard IL-NT controller with Remote display software. No further programing of the display is required – unit is self configurable from the main controller. It is connected with the controller via IL-NT-RS232 communication modules using RS232 line. Longer distances (up to 1200m) are possible using IL-NT-RS232-485 communication module or when RS232/RS485 converters are used. The IL-NT RD hardware type should fit to the master IL-NT. Hint: Please see the IL-NT-RD Remote display software chapter for more details.
Remote announciator IGL — RA15
The remote announciator IGL-RA15 can be connected to the IL-NT unit via CAN bus. Any of the binary outputs can be configured (using LiteEdit software) to each LED diode on the RA15. The module can be also enabled or disabled using LiteEdit software. If IGL-RA15 remote announciator is not communicating with a controller via CAN bus, it activates a warning. See the documentation of RA15 for the technical and function description. Hint:
For connection details please refer to chapter Extension modules (CAN bus) connection. Please see the documentation of RA15 for the technical and function description.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 19 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
165 (6,5”)
38
(1
,5”)
40
(1
,6”)~7
5 (
3,0
”)
~3
5 (
1,4
”)
180 (7,1”)
185 (7,3”)1
06
(4
,2”)
44 (1,7”)
54 (2,1”)
~2
5 (
1,0
”)
12
0 (
4,7
”)
12
5 (
4,9
”)
Cutoutfor Remote Announciator
167 x 108 mm(6,6 x 4,3 )”
IG IOM/PTM module
IG-IOM and IGS-PTM modules are I/O extension modules equipped with 8 binary inputs, 8 binary outputs, 4 analogue inputs and one analogue output. The module can be used for AMF25, MRS15, 16, 19 only.
Binary inputs and outputs are configurable the same way like inputs and outputs on iL. Analogue inputs are configurable like iL with the limitation that the binary and tristate mode
can not be used on PTM module. The protection of analogue IOM/PTM inputs is activated by overcrossing the limits, active only
when the engine is running.
IG-IOM analogue inputs are resistive (the same parameters like IL-NT) 0 -2,4 k. The module IOM is designed for especially VDO resistive sensors.
IGS-PTM analogue inputs are configurable by jumpers to ranges 0-250, 0-100mV, 0-20mA. The module can be used especially for Pt100 sensors and current sensors. The module PTM is not suitable for VDO temperature sensor.
Hint: — For connection details please refer to chapter Extension modules (CAN bus) connection. — For a description of setting IGS-PTM module with current/voltage sensors please see the Extension modules manual. — When module is not configured by LiteEdit SW, controller does not show related values and setpoints — If IGS-PTM is not communicating to a controller, ShutDown protection on controller is activated.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 20 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Hint: If IGS-PTM is not communicating to a controller, ShutDown protection on controller is activated.
See the documentation of IGS-PTM for the technical and function description.
IG-IB Internet bridge
IG-IB Internet bridge enables InteliLite
NT for Ethernet/Internet communicatons. It is connected to
controlle via RS232 line. See the InteliCommunication guide for further details.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 21 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
IL-NT Terminals
IL-NT terminals and face
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 22 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Installation
Mounting
The controller is to be mounted onto the switchboard door. Requested cutout size is 175x115mm. Use the screw holders delivered with the controller to fix the controller into the door as described on pictures below.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 23 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Recommended Wiring
MRS – Wiring Diagram
Hint: It is possible to start Volvo and Scania engines via CAN bus. See Engines started via CAN bus
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 24 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Getting Started
How to install
During the configuration of controller or setpoints changes is required a password to the controller. The default password from ComAp is “0”.
General
To ensure proper function:
Use grounding terminals. Wiring for binary inputs and analog inputs must not be run with power cables. Analog and binary inputs should use shielded cables, especially when length >3m. Hint: Beware of heavy harnesses hanging down from controller terminals. Harnesses must be tightened to panel doors or other suitable place as close to controller as possible.
Wiring
Tightening torque, allowable wire size and type, for the Field-Wiring Terminals: Based on terminal type: PA256:
Specified tightening torque 0,5Nm (4,4 In-lb) 2EDGK:
Specified tightening torque 0,4Nm (3,5 In-lb)
For field type terminals: Use only diameter 2,0-0,5mm (12-26AWG) conductor, rated for 75°C minimum.
For Generator Voltage terminals Use only diameter 2,0-0,5mm (12-26AWG) conductor, rated for 90°C minimum.
Use copper conductors only.
Grounding
The shortest possible piece of wire should be used for controller grounding. Use cable min. 2,5mm
2
Brass M4x10 screw with star washer securing ring type grounding terminal shall be used. The negative “-“ battery terminal has to be properly grounded. Switchboard and engine has to be grounded in common spot. Use as short as possible cable to the grounding point.
Power supply
To ensure proper function: Use min. power supply cable of 1.5mm
2
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 25 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Maximum continuous DC power supply voltage is 36VDC. Maximum allowable power supply voltage is 39VDC. The InteliLite’s power supply terminals are protected against large pulse power disturbances. When there is a potential risk of the controller being subjected to conditions outside its capabilities, an outside protection devise should be used. It is necessary to ensure that potencial difference between generator current COM terminal and battery “-” terminal is maximally ± 2V. Therefore is strongly recommended to interconnect these two terminals together. Hint: The InteliLite
NT controller should be grounded properly in order to protect against lighting strikes!!
The maximum allowable current through the controller’s negative terminal is 4A (this is dependent on binary output load). For the connections with 12VDC power supply, the InteliLite
NT includes internal capacitors that allow
the controller to continue operation during cranking if the battery voltage dip occurs. If the voltage before dip is 10V, after 100ms the voltage recovers to 7 V, the controller continues operating. During this voltage dip the controller screen backlight can turn off and on but the controller keeps operating. It is possible to further support the controller by connecting the external capacitor and separating diode or I-LBA module.
The capacitor size depends on required time. It shall be approximately thousands of microFarads. The capacitor size should be 5 000 microFarad to withstand 150ms voltage dip under following conditions: Voltage before dip is 12V, after 150ms the voltage recovers to min. allowed voltage, i.e. 8V Hint: Before the battery is discharged the message «Low BackupBatt» appears. Or by connecting special I-LBA Low Battery Adaptor module:
The I-LBA module ensures min. 350ms voltage dip under following conditions: RS232 and other plug-in module is connected. Voltage before dip is 12V and after 350ms the voltage recovers to min. allowed voltage 5V. The I-LBA enables controller operation from 5VDC (for 10 to 30 sec). The wiring resistance from battery should be up to 0.1 Ohm for I-LBA proper function. Hint: I-LBA may not eliminate voltage drop when used with low temperature (-40°C) version of controller and display heating element is on (below 5°C). Current drain of heating element exhausts LBA capacitors very fast .
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 26 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Power supply fusing
A one-amp fuse should be connected in-line with the battery positive terminal to the controller and modules. These items should never be connected directly to the starting battery. Fuse value and type depends on number of connected devices and wire length. Recommended fuse (not fast) type — T1A. Not fast due to internal capacitors charging during power up.
Binary output protections
Hint Do not connect binary outputs directly to DC relays without protection diodes, even if they are not connected directly to controller outputs.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 27 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Magnetic pick-up
To ensure proper function: Use a shielded cable
Be aware of interference signal from Speed governor when one speed pick-up is used. If engine will not start:
— Check ground connection from pick-up to controllers, eventually disconnect ground connection to one of them
— Galvanically separate InteliLite RPM input using ComAp separation transformer RPM-ISO (1:1)
— Use separate pick-up for Speed governor and InteliLiteNT
Hint: In some cases the controller will measure a RPM value even though the gen-set is not running: RPM is measured from the generator voltage (Gear teeth = 0) IL-NT is measuring some voltage value on input terminals due to open fusing. If RPM > 0 the controller will be put into a Not ready state and the engine will not be allowed to start.
Current measurement
The number of CT’s is automaticaly selected based on selected value of setpoint ConnectionType [3Ph4Wire / 3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph]. Hint:
— Further informations about measurement limits are at setpoint CT Ratio [/5A] description in chapter Setpoints — Basic Settings.
— Generator currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is bellow <1% of CT range.
To ensure proper function: Use cables of 2,5mm
2
Use transformers to 5A Connect CT according to following drawings:
+
Battery
—
iL
GACSpeed Control Unit
ESD 5500
MAGNETICPICK-UP
CD
a
b
Signal
Signal
+
+-
—
PowerSupply
PowerSupply
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 28 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Three phase application:
It is necessary to ensure that potencial difference between generator current COM terminal and battery “-” terminal is maximally ± 2V. Therefore is strongly recommended to interconnect these two terminals together.
Single phase application:
Connect CT according to following drawings. Terminals L2l and L3l are opened.
CT location
There are two options of CT location. a) Load b) Gen-Set
New setpoint CT Location for AMF20 and AMF25 controllers is placed in group Basic Setting. According to the connection it is possible to set CT location: Load or Gen-Set. When CT Location is set to Load and MCB is closed the controller will display on Mains screen current value. The statistics now contain Mains kWh, Mains kVArh, Genset kWh, Genset kVArh.
Hint: The protections related to the current measurement are active only when Genset is running.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 29 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Earth Fault measurement (module)
The Earth Fault protection is done by extension module IL-NT EFCPM or IC-NT CT-BIO7.
Technical characteristics
— Input current range up to 8,32 mA (IL-NT-EFCPM) — Input current range up to 5 A (IC-NT CT-BIO7) — Measurement range from 0,03 to 5A — Operating frequency 50 or 60 Hz — Tripping current software programmable from 0,03 to 5 A or DISABLED — Tripping delay software programmable from 0,03 to 5 seconds — Included two binary outputs and one binary input (in case of IL-NT-EFCPM) — Included seven binary inputs or seven binary outputs (in case of IL-NT-CT-BIO7) Hint:
For more technical details see IL-NT-EFCPM interface or IC-NT CT-BIO7 interface.
Operating principle
The IL-NT-EFCPM uses toroidal transformer connected to the earth wire (Figure 2). When the measured current exceeds the set value, this indicates that part of the current is dispersed to earth and after the set Earth Fault Del then Earth Fault Sd protection and AL EarthFault output are activated. Earth Fault protection is not active when gen-set does not run and also when EF Protection: DISABLED.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 30 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
IL-NT-EFCPM wiring
Figure 2: Wiring IL-NT-EFCPM
IL-NT-EFCPM
Input Description
0 Input range up to 8,32 mA (earth fault protection input)
1 Common (earth fault protection input)
2 NC
3 NC
4 NC
5 NC
6 Binary input 1
7 Binary output 1
8 Binary output 2
9 Power supply – Minus
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 31 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
IC-NT CT-BIO7 wiring
Voltage measurement and generator connection types
There are 4 voltage measurement ConnectionType (setpoint ConnectionType [3Ph4Wire / 3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph]) options, every type matches to corresponding generator connection type. The generator protections are evaluated from different voltages based on ConnectionType setting:
3W 4Ph – Ph-Ph voltage
3W 3Ph – Ph-Ph voltage
Split Ph – Ph-N voltage
Mono Ph – Ph-N voltage
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 32 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
ConnectionType: 3 Phase 4 Wires
Three phase “wye” measurement – 3PY 3 Phase 4 Wires — STAR Connection
ConnectionType: 3 Phase 3 Wires
Three phase “delta” measurement – 3PD 3 Phase 3 Wires
– DELTA Connection – HI-LEG (WILD-LEG, RED-LEG) DELTA Connection
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 33 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Hint: Only L1, L2 and L3 wires should be connected. In case of HI-LEG (WILD-LEG, RED-LEG) DELTA connection the N (neutral) wire (in the diagram connected between T6 and T9) has to be disconnected. No separation transformers for three wires voltage connection (without N) are needed.
ConnectionType: Split Phase
Single-phase measurement – 1PH Split Phase – DOUBLE DELTA Connection – ZIG ZAG (DOG LEG) Connection
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 34 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
ConnectionType: Mono Phase
Single-phase measurement – 1PH Hint: There has been a change in wiring of monophase at voltage terminals between firmwares IL-NT1.4 and IL-NT1.5! Picture above shows connection for IL-NT 1.5. Wiring for older firmwares is described in older IL-NT manuals, line L1 was connected to all three terminals L1,L2 and L3. Mono Phase – MONOPHASE Connection
Hint: Switchboard lighting strike protection according standard regulation is expected for all 4 connection types!!!
Hint: Phase sequence check is not possible to evaluate under voltage 50V what causes that if measured voltage 50V is within the allowed range, controller will not allow to close the GCB, even if relevant LED diod on front panel of IL-NT lits.
Analog inputs
Three analog inputs are available on the IL-NT. First analog input is fixed to be used for engine Oil Pressure.
Configuration
Each analog input can be configured by LiteEdit software following way. (First analog input is dedicated to engine Oil pressure).
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 35 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Analog input item LiteEdit Possibility
Type Type Not used Alarm Monitoring
Analog input isn’t used Analog is measured and used for protection Analog is only measured and not used for protection
Analog input name Name Up to 14 ASCII characters
Config of input Config Analog Binary (not supp. by PTM) Tri-state (not supp. by PTM)
Analog measuring in specified range. Binary: open/close — threshold
750 . Three-state: open/close —
threshold 750 ,
Failure <10 or > 2400
Physical dimension Dim bar,%,°C, … Up to 4 ASCII characters (Valid only for analog inputs)
Polarity Contact type
NC NO
Valid only for binary and three-state inputs Valid only for binary and three-state inputs
Protection direction Protection Over Overstep. Sensor Fail does not activate protection.
Over+Fls Overstep and Sensor Fail activates protection.
Under Under step. Sensor Fail does not activate protection.
Under+Fls Under step and Sensor Fail activates protection.
Sensor characteristic Sensor Predefined user curves User changeable and configurable
Resolution Resolution 0 – 0,00001 Sensor resolution (Valid only for analog inputs)
Each Analog input has separate set points for two level alarm setting. Analog input alarm levels and delay adjust in Extension I/O and Engine Protect group. Hint: Description of Sensor fail evaluation can be found in chapter Alarm Management, article Sensor Fail (FLS).
Connection of IL-NT analog inputs
AI1
AI2
3 x RESISTIVESENSOR
AI3
CO
M
-P
OW
ER
Standard connection of three resistive sensors to analog inputs.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 36 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
2x
470
CO
M-
PO
WE
R
AI1
AI2
AI3
Mixed connection of InteliLite analog inputs: AI1 – binary input AI2 – three state input AI3 – analog resistive input
Hint: Description of analog inputs with COM terminal and 4 pins relates to units with HW version 1.3. Older HW versions do not have “COM” terminal and use only 3 pins AI1, AI2 and AI3.
Wiring
Wiring diagrams of analog inputs for IL-NT HW 1.3:
WIRING OF ANALOG INPUTS-GROUNDED SENSORS
WIRING OF ANALOG INPUTS-ISOLATED SENSORS
Wiring diagrams of analog inputs for IL-NT HW 1.1 and older:
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 37 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Analog inputs are designed for resistive sensors with resistance in range of 0 to 2,4k. To ensure a proper function use shielded cables, especially for length over >3m. COM terminal is dedicated to measure ground voltage potential difference between engine and controller.
As binary input
Open, close state are detected, threshold level is 750 .
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 38 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
As three state input
Open, close and failure state are detected. Threshold level is 750 , failure is detected when circuit
resistance is <10 or > 2400 . Hint: Protections on binary and three state inputs are following: IL-NT: AI1 Shutdown IG-IOM: AI1 Shutdown AI2 Shutdown AI2 Shutdown AI3 Warning AI3 Shutdown AI4 Shutdown
Unused analog inputs
Configure Type = Not used
Example of analog input configuration
Configure Engine Temp input for measuring in °C, VDO 40-120°C sensor, range -16 to 120 °C. Alarm protection level set to 90 °C, shut down level 110 °C. Start LiteEdit and select – Controller — Configuration – Modify – Engine Temp. Set configuration for Engine temp analog input: Type: Selection between Not used and Alarm “Not used” – analog input isn’t used ”Alarm” – analog input is used Set to: Alarm Name: Name of the analog input. Maximally 14 letters. Set to: Engine Temp Config: Selection between Analog, Binary Tri-state input. “Analog” – resistor sensor is connected to Analog input. “Binary” – open/close contact is connected between Analog input and COM terminal of Analog inputs. Analog input detects only open/close state. “Tri-state” – open/close contact is connected parallel to one of two serial resistors between Analog input and COM terminal of Analog inputs. Set to: Analog Alarm Properties: Selection between different direction of protection – Under Limit, Over Limit or combination with Fail sensor. “Engine running only” – check this setting if you wish to active protection on analog input only while engine is running, not, when it stops. Set to: Over Limit Contact type: selection of polarity only when analog input is configured as Binary or Tri-state. When is analog input configured as analog this setting has no sense. „NC“ – polarity of binary or tri-state input „NO“ – polarity of binary or tri-state input Sensor: selection of sensor characteristic „Unused input“ — when Analog input is not used. On the InteliLite screen is displayed „####“ value, no alarm is detected. Default user curves predefined on AI1 – AI3: „VDO 10 Bar“ – VDO pressure sensor „VDO 40-120 °C“ – VDO temperature sensor „VDO level %“ – VDO level sensor Set to: VDO 40-120 °C When you choose the predefined or user curve the Sensor Name, Dim and Resolution are setted automaticly according to curve, user modification is possible.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 39 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Sensor Name: Name of used sensor, up to 14 letters can be used. Dim: Name of measured unit (Bar, °C, %, …), up to 4 letters can be used. Resolution: setting of resolution of measured value.
„0“ — e.g. 360 kPa, 100%, 50 C „1“ – e.g. 360.0 kPa „2“- e.g. 360.00 kPa „3“ — e.g. 360.000 kPa Set to: 1 When Analog input configuration is finished set the setpoints AI1 Wrn, AI1 Sd, AI1 Del in Engine Protect group. Each Analog input has separate triplet of setpoints: Wrn level, Sd level, AI del. Names of these setpoints are fix defined Number of decimal points of Wrn level and Sd level is the same as the configured number of decimal points of measured value.
Analog input extension measurement (0 — 70V, 4 — 20mA)
On each analog input there is a possibility to connect voltage or current output sensor instead of resistive one. Recommended wiring connection for these measurements are bellow. Voltage output sensor — connection
Current output sensor – connection
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 40 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Table with recommended values
Analog input R1 R2 Curve
0 — 10V 150Ω [1%,0,5W] 100Ω [1%,0,5W] AI 0-10V.CRV
0 — 30V 680Ω [5%,2W] 100Ω [1%,0,5W] AI 0-30V.CRV
0 — 65V 1500Ω [5%,3W] 100Ω [1%,0,5W] AI 0-65V.CRV
4 – 20mA R = 160Ω [1%,0,5W] AI 4-20mA.CRV Hint: Please note that external resistors disconnection, connection incorrect resistors or input voltage value during operation may cause an analog input destruction. Practical example: VDO pressure sensor 0 – 6bar with linear voltage output 0 – 10V Conversion table
Vout [V] 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P [bar] 0 0,6 1,2 1,8 2,4 3 3,6 4,2 4,8 5,4 6 Modify one of analog input in LiteEdit configuration and load curve AI 0-10V.CRV Than you can change resolution and measured value name witch is default displayed at V (volts). For example if you have connected pressure sensor and his output voltage is 5V for pressure 3bar you can change value ‘V’ in column “Dim:” to ‘Bar’ and by sensor specification adjust all corresponding values in this column. In this case you can change the value at row 6. from 5 to 3.
When you finish with adjusting the values click OK and Write to controller.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 41 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
+
Battery
—
iL
4k7
+ —
PowerSupply
Binary inputs and outputs
Recommended CAN/RS485 connection
CAN bus connection
The bus has to be terminated by 120 Ohm resistors at both ends. External units can be connected on the CAN bus line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no star) is necessary. Standard maximum bus length is 200m Shielded cable has to be used, shielding has to be connected to PE on one side (controller side).
A) For shorter distances (all network components within one room) – picture 1 Interconnect H and L; shielding connect to PE on controller side B) For longer distances (connection between rooms within one building) – picture 2 Interconnect H, L, COM; shielding connect to PE in one point C) In case of surge hazard (connection out of building in case of storm etc.) – picture 3 We recommend to use following protections:
+
Battery
—
iL
LOAD
+ —
PowerSupply
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 42 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
— Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-12DC-ST with PT2x2-BE (base element) — Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-012/2 R DJ
Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) A) For shorter distances: 3105A Paired — EIA Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1×2 conductors) B) For longer distances: 3106A Paired — EIA Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1×2+1 conductors) C) In case of surge hazard: 3106A Paired — EIA Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1×2+1 conductors)
RS485 connection
The line has to be terminated by 120 Ohm resistors at both ends. External units can be connected on the RS485 line in any order, but keeping line arrangement (no tails, no star) is necessary. Standard maximum link length is 1000m. Shielded cable has to be used, shielding has to be connected to PE on one side (controller side).
A) For shorter distances (all network components within one room) – picture 1 interconnect A and B; shielding connect to PE on controller side B) For longer distances (connection between rooms within one building) – picture 2 interconnect A, B, COM; shielding connect to PE in one point C) In case of surge hazard (connection out of building in case of storm etc.) – picture 3 We recommend to use following protections:
— Phoenix Contact (http://www.phoenixcontact.com): PT 5-HF-5DC-ST with PT2x2-BE (base element) (or MT-RS485-TTL) — Saltek (http://www.saltek.cz): DM-006/2 R DJ
Recommended data cables: BELDEN (http://www.belden.com) A) For shorter distances: 3105A Paired — EIA Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1×2 conductors) B) For longer distances: 3106A Paired — EIA Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1×2+1 conductors) C) In case of surge hazard: 3106A Paired — EIA Industrial RS-485 PLTC/CM (1×2+1 conductors) Picture 1 — shorter distances (all network components within one room)
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 43 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Picture 2 — longer distances (connection between rooms within one building)
CA
N1 H
COML
CA
N2
120
1.iS-CU
Addr.: 1Addr.: 1
CA
N1
CA
N1
8.iS-AIN
Addr.: 8
7.iS-BINAddr.: in13
out7
CA
N1
CA
N1
1.iS-AIN
Addr.: 1
120
1.iS-BINAddr.: in1
out1
CA
N1
CA
N22.iS-CU
120
HCOM
L
HCOM
L
HCOM
L
HCOM
L
HCOM
L
HCOM
L
HCOM
L
Picture 3 — surge hazard (connection out of building in case of storm etc.) 120 Ω 120 Ω
PT5-HF-12DC-ST (CAN) PT5-HF-5DC-ST (RS485)
Extension modules (CAN bus) connection
CAN H
CAN L
IGL-RA15 (optional)
CAN H
CAN L
or
CA
NL
CA
NH
CO
M
IGS-PTM (optional)
CA
NL
CA
NH
CO
M
IG-IOM (optional)
59 CA
NL
CAN
H
120 ohm
EXTENSION
MODULES
H
L
120
ohm
10 ohm
15nF
COM
IL-NT
H/A L/B COM
H/A L/B COM
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 44 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
EXTENSION
MODULESCOM
CAN H
CAN L
IGL-RA15
(optional)
Engine
Electronic Control Unit
CAN H
CAN L
CAN H
CAN L
H
L
or
120
ohm
CA
NL
CA
NH
CO
M
IGS-PTM (optional)
CA
NL
CA
NH
CO
M
IG-IOM (optional)
59 CA
NL
CA
NH
120 ohm
CAN HICAN LO
120
ohm
10 ohm
15nF
COM
IL-NT
Connection rules
CAN bus line must be connected in series, from one unit to the next (no star, no cable stubs, no branches) both ends must be by the 120-ohm (internal or external) resistor terminated. Maximal CAN bus length is up to 200 meters. For CAN data cables details see chapter Technical data – Communication interface. CAN cable shielding connect to IL-NT COM terminal. IL-NT contains internal fix 120-ohm resistor and must be located on the CAN bus end. New units with HW version 1.3 have terminating resistor jumper located at CAN terminal. New IG-IOM and IGS-PTM units contain internal jumper removable 120-ohm resistor (in older IOM types are fix resistors). To be sure check resistor presence by ohmmeter. Unit with internal resistor connect to the end of CAN line. Following connections are supported (IOM, PTM, ECU order is not important).
IL- NT – IG-IOM IL- NT – IGS-PTM IL- NT – IGL-RA15 IL- NT – IG-IOM – IGL-RA15 IL- NT – IGS-PTM – IGL-RA15
It is possible to connect only one IG-IOM or IGS-PTM and one IGL-RA15 to IL-NT.
Use button in LiteEdit configuration window to activate CAN (J1939) interface with ECU.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 45 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Inputs and Outputs For Inputs/Outputs overview table see chapter Technical Data. Hint: Any Binary input or output can be configured to any IL-NT controller terminal or changed to different function by LiteEdit software. There is fix 1 sec delay when any binary input is configured as protection.
Binary inputs IL-NT — default
BI1 Rem Start/Stop
BI2 Access Lock
BI3 Emergency Stop
BI4 Remote OFF
BI5 Sd Override
BI6 RemControlLock
Binary inputs – list
Not Used
Binary input has no function. Use this configuration when Binary input is not connected.
Alarm
If the input is closed (or opened) selected alarm is activated. Binary Alarm configuration items
Name 14 characters ASCII string
Contact type NC Normally closed
NO Normally opened
Alarm type Warning
BOC
Shut down
Alarm active All the time Valid if checkbox “Engine running only” is not checked
Engine running only Valid if checkbox “Engine running only” is checked
GCB Feedback
Use this input for indication, whether the generator circuit breaker is open or closed. Hint: IL-NT controller can work even without breaker feedbacks, in this case do not configure the feedback to binary inputs. For more details see chapter GCB fail detection.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 46 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Rem Start/Stop
External request for engine run. AUT mode only.
Emergency Stop
If the input is opened, shut down is immediately activated. Input is inverted (normally closed) in default configuration. Hint: In case of controller hardware or software fail, safe stop of the engine doesn’t have to be ensured. To back-up the Emergency Stop function it is recommended to connect separate circuit for disconnection of Fuel Solenoid and Starter signals.
Sd Override
If the input is closed all alarms are disabled except the binary input EMERGENCY STOP and «engine overspeed protection».
all IL alarms are detected,
IL front panel gen-set RED LED blinks or lights,
alarm is recorded on the IL alarm list screen,
BUT gen-set remains running. Hint: Alarm Sd Override is indicated in the AlarmList if Sd Override mode active to inform the operator that the engine is not protected.
Access Lock
If the input is closed, no setpoints can be adjusted from controller front panel and gen-set mode (OFF-MAN-AUT) cannot be changed. Hint: Access lock does not protect setpoints and mode changing from LiteEdit. To avoid unqualified changes the selected setpoints can be password protected. Also the buttons Fault reset, Horn reset are not blocked at all and buttons Start and Stop in MAN mode are not blocked.
Remote OFF
If closed, iL is switched to OFF mode (there are four modes OFF-MAN-AUT-TEST). When opens controller is switched back to previous mode. Hint: This binary input should be connected to schedule timer switch, to avoid start of engine.
Remote MAN
If the input is active, MAN mode is forced to the controller independently on the position of the MODE selector.
Remote AUT
If the input is active, AUT mode is forced to the controller independently on the position of the MODE selector. If another of „remote“ inputs is active, then the REMOTE AUT input has the lowest priority.
RemControlLock
If the input is active, setpoints writing or command sending from the external terminal is disabled.
Emergency MAN
If the input is activated the controller behaves like when switched to OFF Mode. Opens all binary outputs. There is one exception – STOP SOLENOID doesn’t activate on this transition.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 47 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Detection of «running» engine and subsequent alarm message «Wrn Stop Fail» is blocked. The controller shows “Emerg Man” state and the engine can not be started. Generator current and power measurement is active in this mode, regardless of the actual state of the engine. After the input is open again, the controller recovers to previous state and behaves according to the actual situation . Function is active in any controller mode.
Start Button
Binary input has the same function as Start button on the InteliLite front panel. It is active in MAN
mode only.
Stop Button
Binary input has the same function as Stop button on the InteliLite front panel. It is active in MAN
Mode only. Hint: Changed function of Stop Button. After the first pressing from running state, there is a standard delay and controller change state to cooling. After holding the button down for 2 seconds controller goes to stop state. The same holds true for BI “Stop Button”.
FaultResButton
Binary input has the same function as Fault reset button on the InteliLite front panel.
HornResButton
Binary input has the same function as Horn reset button on the InteliLite front panel.
^GCB button
Binary input has the same function as GCB button on the InteliLite front panel. It is active in MAN
mode only.
Lang Selection Not configured
Language selection is done only through the controller display. Pressing ENTER and PAGE buttons
concurrently and then only PAGE button separately.
Configured on any binary input If the output is opened the first (default) language is active and if the input is closed then the second language is active. In case there is more languages available in the controller it is not possible to select any other language even through the controller display.
Alt. Config.
This BI can switch between basic controller settings in Alternate Cfg setpoint group.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 48 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Binary outputs IL-NT MRS16 — default
BO1 Starter
BO2 Fuel Solenoid
BO3 GCB Close/Open
BO4 Prestart
BO5 Ready To Load
BO6 Alarm
Hint: The description of binary outputs of a controller relates also to IOM/PTM modules.
Binary outputs — list
Not used
Output has no function.
Starter
The closed relay energizes the starter motor. The relay opens if:
the “firing” speed is reached or
maximum time of cranking is exceeded or
request to stop comes up
Fuel Solenoid
Closed output opens the fuel solenoid and enables the engine start. The output opens if:
EMERGENCY STOP comes or
Cooled gen-set is stopped or
in pause between repeated starts
Stop Solenoid The closed output energizes stop solenoid to stop the engine. This output is deactivate 10s after the still engine conditions are evaluated. Hint: For more detail see chapter “Stop engine” conditions in chapter Gen-set Operation States Hint: The engine can be started anytime, if all symptoms say the engine is steady regardless of the fact the Stop Solenoid can still be active (in that case it is deactivated before cranking).
Stop Pulse Output is active for 1 second after Stop Solenoid output activation. This signal is sent to ECU in case of engine stop request.
Ignition
The output closes after reaching value of CrankRPM, fixed 30RPM. Opens after stopping of the engine or in pause during repeated start.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 49 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Prestart The output closes prior to the engine start (Prestart) and opens when Starting RPM speed is reached. During crank attempts the output is closed too. The output could be used for pre-glow, pre-heat or prelubrication.
Cooling Pump
The output closes when gen-set starts and opens after stop of the engine.
Idle/Nominal The output Idle/Nominal closes after the timer Idle Time elapses. The Idle Time counter starts to countdown when Starting RPM reached. The Underspeed protection is not evaluated during fixed 5 seconds period after reaching Starting RPM. A Start Fail protection occurs if the RPM drop below 2RPM during idle. Hint: Connect binary output “Idle/Nominal” to speed governor to switch the speed: opened = IDLE, closed=NOMINAL.
Air Valves Closes together with Prestart. Opens after the engine is stopped. Stopped engine conditions: RPM = 0, Engine Params: Starting Oil P, D+ (when enabled).
Alarm
The output closes if :
any warning or shutdown comes up or
the gen-set malfunctions The output opens if
FAULT RESET is pressed
The output closes again if a new fault comes up.
Horn The output closes if:
any warning or shutdown comes up or
the gen-set malfunctions The output opens if:
FAULT RESET is pressed or
HORN RESET is pressed or
Max time of HORN is exceeded (Horn Timeout) The output closes again if a new fault comes up.
GCB Close/Open
MRS11, 16: The output controls the generator circuit breaker. MRS10, 15 (GCB no GCB button):
The output closes automatically (in MAN or AUT mode) after engine is started, Min Stab Time elapsed, and generator voltage and frequency is in limits.
Hint: Supposed time to close (reaction time) of GCB is 0,1 sec. IL-NT controller can work even without breakers feedback, in this case do not configure the feedback to binary inputs. For more details see chapter GCB fail detection.
GCB ON Coil
The output activates Generator Circuit Breaker coil.
GCB OFF Coil The output deactivates Generator Circuit Breaker coil.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 50 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
GCB UV Coil
The output controls Generator Circuit Breaker coil after voltage drop-out.
Ready
The output is closed if following conditions are fulfilled:
Gen-set is not running and
No Shut down is active
Controller is not in OFF Mode
Ready To Load
The output is closed if genset is running and all electric values are in limits no alarm is active — it is possible to close GCB or it is already closed. The output opens during cooling state.
Running
Output closes if the engine is in Running state.
Cooling The output closes when gen-set is in Cooling state.
Supplying Load
Closed when the generator current is > 0,5% of the CT ratio. Exact formulas: Output is closed when the current at least in one phase is for 1 sec over CT ratio/200+2 Output is opened when the current in all three phases is for 1 sec below CT ratio/200+2 Hint: Values are truncated after division, not rounded.
Fault Reset The output is a copy of Fault Reset button on controller and binary input FaultResButton.
Gen Healthy
The output is copy of generator status LED on iL front panel. The output is closed if genset is running and all genset electric values are in limits.
Exerc Timer 1
Output activates when Timer 1 is active. Simultaneously, gen-set is started when it is in AUT mode. See setpoint Timer1..2Function [No Func/Auto Run/Mode OFF] for details.
Exerc Timer 2
Output activates when Timer 2 is active. See setpoint Timer1..2Function [No Func/Auto Run/Mode OFF] for details.
Glow Plugs
The output closes prior to the engine start (by Prestart Time) and opens at the beginning of cranking time. In case of repeated crank attempts the output closes always prior to the other engine start attempts (by Prestart Time) and is opened during crank attempts.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 51 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Fuel Pump
Output closes when the value of Fuel Level lies under the value of Fuel Pump ON setpoint and opens when value of Fuel Pump OFF is reached. Hint: Fuel pump function is internaly connected to analog input 3 to monitor the actual fuel level in tank. It is a prerequisite for this function to use a fuel level sensor at this analog input.
Temp Switch
This switch is assigned to the controller’s analog input 2 – commonly used for water temperature sensing. The setpoints TempSwitch ON and TempSwitchOFF for on and off level adjustment are located in the setpoint group Engine Params. Typical usage for this binary output can be activation of fans or heaters. The output behaves based on the setpoint adjustment as described on picture lower:
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 52 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Power Switch
This switch is assigned to the gen-set active power. The setpoints PowerSwitch ON [kW] and PowerSwitch OFF [kW] for on and off level adjustment are located in the setpoint group Engine Params. Typical usage for this binary output can be switching of dummy load. The output behaves based on the setpoint adjustment as described on picture lower: Hint: Power switch function and corresponding binary output is activated 30s after the engine is running.
Maintenance
Output closes if the Maintenance alarm activates, i.e. the gen-set has been running for more than Engine Protect:WrnMaintenance. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
Ctrl HeartBeat
Output signalizes Watchdog Reset. In a healthy state it blinks at 500ms : 500ms rate. When Watchdog Reset occurs, it stops blinking.
Mode OFF
The output is closed, if OFF Mode is selected.
Mode MAN
The output is closed, if MAN Mode is selected.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 53 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Mode AUT
The output is closed, if AUT Mode is selected.
AL D+ Fail
Output closes if gen-set is running and D+ input not energized. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
Hint: Treshhold level for D+ input is 80% supply voltage.
AL Gen >V
The output closes if the generator overvoltage shutdown alarm activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL Gen <V
The output closes if the generator undervoltage shutdown alarm activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL Gen Volts
The output closes if the generator over/under voltage shutdown alarm or voltage asymmetry shutdown alarm activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL Gen Freq
Output closes if the generator over/under frequency shutdown alarm activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL Gen >Freq Output closes if the generator over frequency alarm activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL Gen <Freq
Output closes if the generator under frequency alarm activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL OverloadBOC
Output closes if the generator overload alarm activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 54 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
AL Stop Fail
Output closes when the engine has to be stopped, but speed or frequency or voltage or oil pressure is detected (“Still Engine” conditions). This protection goes active when Stop Time setpoint value exceed and any Running engine conditions are detected after stop command or under conditions for activating Wrn Stop Fail alarm on Still engine: — for generator voltage < 50% of nominal voltage, Sd Stop Fail has delay 1s — for generator voltage > 50% of nominal voltage, Sd Stop Fail has delay 200ms — for oil pressure > starting oil pressure, Sd Stop Fail has delay 1s
For detected RPM, there is no delay. Hint: For more details see chapter „Stop engine“ conditiones in chapter Gen-set Operation states With start goes this protection inactive. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL Overspeed
Output closes if the gen-set over speed alarm activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL Underspeed
Output closes if the gen-set under speed alarm activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL Start Fail
Output closes after the gen-set start-up fails. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL Overcurrent
Output closes if the generator *IDMT over current or current unbalance or short current alarm activates.
The output opens, if Alarm is not active and FAULT RESET is pressed
AL BatteryFail
Output closes when IL-NT performs reset during start procedure (probably due to weak battery) or when battery under/over voltage warning appears. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL EarthFault
Output closes when Earth Fault Current is detected (extension module is needed). The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 55 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
FAULT RESET is pressed
Hint: For more details see chapter Earth Fault Measurement
AL Common Wrn
Output closes when any warning alarm appears. The output opens, if
No warning alarm is active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL Common Sd Output closes when any shut-down alarm appears. The output opens, if
No sd alarm is active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL Common BOC
The output closes when any BOC alarm appears. The output opens, if:
No BOC alarm is active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL Common Fls
Output closes when any Sensor Fail alarm appears. The output opens, if
No warning alarm is active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL AI1 Sd
Output closes if the engine oil pressure (configured to the first analog input) shutdown alarm activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL AI1 Wrn
Output closes if the engine oil pressure (configured to the first analog input) warning alarm activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL AI2 Sd
Output closes if the engine water temperature (configured to the second analog input) shutdown alarm activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
AL AI2 Wrn
Output closes if the engine water temperature (configured to the second analog input) warning alarm activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 56 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
AL AI3 Sd
Output closes if the engine Fuel Level (configured to the third analog input) shutdown alarm activates.
AL AI3 Wrn
Output closes if the engine Fuel Level (configured to the third analog input) warning alarm activates.
BI1..6 Status
* IOM BI1..7 Status The outputs give an information about the assigned binary input. In case the assigned binary input is configured to alarm type, then the output closes when the alarm activates. It opens if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
In case the assigned binary input is configured to any control function, the output propagates the state of the input.
* AL IOM AI1..4 Sd
Output closes if shutdown alarm on the appropriate IOM/PTM analog input activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
* AL IOM AI1..4 Wrn
Output closes if warning alarm on the appropriate IOM/PTM analog input activates. The output opens, if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
* ExtBI1..7 Status The outputs give an information about the assigned binary input. In case the assigned binary input is configured to alarm type, then the output closes when the alarm activates. It opens if
alarm is not active and
FAULT RESET is pressed
In case the assigned binary input is configured to any control function, the output propagates the state of the input. Hint: Valid when extension module IL-NT BIO8 or IL-NT CT-BIO7 is configured.
ECU Comm OK
If the ECU is not communicating and all values from ECU show #### the output is not active. If the ECU communicates the output is active.
ECU Comm Error The output is an inversion of binary output ECU Comm OK, i.e. the output is closed when ECU is not communicating and all values from ECU show #####. Communication error causes stop of the engine.
ECU YellowLamp
The output copies warning information from ECU.
ECU Red Lamp
The output copies shutdown information from ECU.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 57 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
ECU PowerRelay
The output closes at the beginning of prestart and opens if the engine shall be stopped. This output can be used to indicate when the ECU should be powered up i.e. only while the engine is running. This output also influences evaluation of communication failure with ECU and related FLS alarms from analog inputs read from the ECU. If the output is configured (which means configured on physical binary output or VPIO output), the issuing of communication error is blocked during Prestart and Stopping procedure as shown in the picture.
Analog inputs
It is possible to configure on each Analog input:
Reading from IL Analog inputs or from Engine Control Unit via CAN bus (J1939)
Sensor characteristics – from the list, or custom sensor curve
Value dimension (e.g. psi — bars, F — C, % — l)
Sensor resolution Warning and shut-down limits are adjusted in Engine Protect group. The analog inputs are configurable. Use LiteEdit software to modify configuration. Default configuration is:
Oil Pressure
Oil pressure analog input. Default VDO sensor in range 0 to 10.0 bars.
Water Temp
Water temperature analog input. Default VDO sensor in range 40 to 120 C.
Fuel Level
Fuel Level analog input. Default VDO sensor 0-180R = 0-100% Hint: For further information about analog inputs configuration see Analog inputs.
CAN J1939 interface
Following values can be received from Engine Control Unit via CAN bus instead of measuring on IL-NT terminals when J1939 interface is enabled.
Value Value is received from
J1939 enabled J1939 disabled
Beginning of Prestart
Fuel solenoid deactivation
ECU communication failure alarm blocked
End of Prestart
Engine stopped
t
ECU PwrRelay
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 58 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
RPM ECU IL-NT – RPM terminals
Oil pressure ECU or IL-NT AI1 IL-NT AI1 terminals
Water temperature ECU or IL-NT AI2 IL-NT AI2 terminals
Fuel Level ECU or IL-NT AI3 IL-NT AI3 terminals
ECU State ECU
Fuel Rate ECU
Manifold temp ECU
Boost Pressure ECU
Percent Load ECU
Use LiteEdit to enable/disable J1939 interface and to configure IL-NT analog inputs. Hint: RPM reading is automatically switched to pickup or generator voltage measuring (depends on Basic setting: Gear Teeth value) if J1939 fails.
Analog outputs
Optional plug in card IL-NT AOUT8 provides eigth Pulse-With-Modulation (PWM) outputs. These are intended to drive VDO style analog gauges. This is to provide visual indication of typically ECU values without installing aditional sensors on the engine. PWM signal emulates sensor which would be typically mounted on the engine. Any value from controler may be configured to the outputs. Use LiteEdit PC SW to configure coresponding sensor/gauge curve and value selection.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 59 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Setpoints
Password
EnterPassword
Password is a four-digit number. Password enables change of relevant protected setpoints.
Use or keys to set and ENTER key to enter the password.
Hint: There is only 1 level of a password.
ChangePassword
Use or keys to set and ENTER key to change the password.
Hint: At first the password has to be entered before the new password can be changed. During the configuration of controller or setpoints changes is required a password to the controller. The default password from manufacturer is “0”. Maximum value of password is “9999”. Controller has following functions:
Automatic checking of password during change to be maximally 9999, if it is bigger value it will be automatically changed to 0. LiteEdit (LE) will prevent to write bigger value than 9999.
Cyclic rotation of value of password in case of using arrows on controller
Basic Settings
Gen-set Name
User defined name, used for InteliLite identification at remote phone or mobile connection. Gen-set Name is max 14 characters long and have to be entered using LiteEdit software.
Nomin Power [kW]
Nominal power of the generator Step: 1kW Range: 1 – 5000 kW
Nomin Current [ A ]
It is current limit for generator *IDMT over current and short current protection and means maximal continuous generator current. See Gener Protect: *Amps IDMT Del, Short Crct Sd setpoints. Nominal Current can be different from generator rated current value. Step: 1 A Range: 1 — 10000 A
CT Ratio [/5A]
Gen-set phases current transformers ratio. Step: 1 A Range: 1 – 5000 A / 5A Hint: Generator currents and power measurement is suppressed if current level is bellow <1% of CT range.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 60 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
For firmware versions <= 1.4: For CT Ratio <= 250 the values of power and current are displayed in a controller with one decimal. For CT Ratio > 250 the values of power and current are displayed in a controller with integral numbers. If you change CT Ratio in LiteEdit or directly in the controller, decimal numbers will not be changed immediately. The change will be executed only by reconfiguring in LiteEdit. The statistics of power will be recounted at this time with regards to decimal numbers of power. WARNING! When you change the firmware, statistics can be invalid! Check the statistical values. If necessary value change is possible by LiteEdit software (password is required). WARNING! Change of CT ratio over value 250 without reconfiguring in LiteEdit can cause overflow of current measurement and improper function of controller! WARNING! For CT Ratio <= 250 the measured current on generator or mains shall not be bigger than:
6500A or equivalent of 3200kVA on any phase or total kVA or equivalent of 3200kW on any phase or in total kW.
For CT Ratio > 250 are the same conditions with limits of 65000A,32000kVA and 32000kW. For firmware version >1.5: Decimal switching is not done via value of “CT ratio” setpoint, but in configuration window of LiteEdit software via icon „Units/Formats“. WARNING! In case of one decimal displayed at power values the measured current on generator or mains shall not be bigger than:
6500A or equivalent of 3200kVA on any phase or total kVA or equivalent of 3200kW on any phase or in total kW.
For no decimal displayed are the same conditions with limits of 65000A,32000kVA and 32000kW.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 61 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
PT Ratio [/1] Gen-set potential transformers ratio. Step: 0,1 V / V Range: 0,1 – 500,0 V / V
NomVolts Ph-N [V]
Nominal generator voltage (phase to neutral) Step: 1V Range: 80 – 20000 V Hint: Phase sequence check is not possible to evaluate under voltage 50V what causes that if measured voltage 50V is within the allowed range, controller will not allow to close the GCB, even if relevant LED diod on front panel of IL-NT lits.
NomVolts Ph-Ph [V]
Nominal generator voltage (phase to phase)
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 62 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Step: 1V Range: 138 – 35000 V
Nominal Freq [Hz]
Nominal generator frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz ) Step: 1Hz Range: 45 – 65 Hz
Gear Teeth [-]
Number of teeth on the engine gear for the pick-up. Set to zero, if no pick-up is used. Engine speed is counted from the generator frequency. Step: 1 Range: 0 – 500 Hint: Generator frequency can be used only when generator voltage (min 10Vef) is present before reaching of the firing speed (Starting RPM) after start.
Nominal RPM [RPM]
Nominal engine speed. Step: 1RPM Range: 100 – 4000 RPM
ControllerMode [ OFF, MAN, AUT]
Equivalent to Controller mode changes by MODE or MODE buttons.
Hint: Controller Mode change can be separately password protected.
Reset To MAN [ENABLED/DISABLED] DISABLED: Controller stays in AUT mode after Fault reset . ENABLED: Automatic switch from AUT (or TEST) to MAN Mode after Fault reset to avoid
automatic engine start. This function is active for Shut down protection only.
BacklightTime [min]
When this timer exceed than the display backlight is switched off. Step: 1 Range: 0 – 241min
ConnectionType [3Ph4Wire / 3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph]
3Ph4Wire: STAR Connection, 3 phases and neutral — 4 wires, Three phase “wye” measurement – 3PY, 3x CT‘s
3Ph3Wire: DELTA Connection, 3 Phase without neutral — 3 Wires, Three phase “delta” measurement – 3PD, 3x CT‘s
Split Phase: DOUBLE DELTA Connection, Split Phase, Single-phase measurement – 1PH, 1xCT
Mono Phase: MONOPHASE, Single-phase measurement – 1PH, 1x CT
Hint: For more details about connection types see Voltage measurement and generator connection types chapter. For details about influence of Connection type setting on voltage values in history check History file chapter.
CT Location [Load/GenSet]
Load: Controller stays in AUT Mode after Fault Reset . GenSet: Automatic switch from AUT (or TEST) to MAN Mode after Fault Reset to avoid
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 63 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
automatic engine start. This function is active for Shut down protection only. Hint: More details about this function is introduced in chapter CT Location.
Comms Settings
ControllerAddr (1 .. 32) [-]
Controller identification number. It is possible to set controller address different from the default value (1) so that more IL controllers can be interconnected (via RS485) and accessed e.g. from Modbus terminal. Hint: When opening connection to the controller it’s address has to correspond with the setting in PC tool. From LiteEdit it is only possible to connect to controllers with address 1.
COM1 Mode [DIRECT/MODEM/MODBUS/ECU LINK]
Communication protocol switch for the COM1 channel. DIRECT: LiteEdit communication protocol via direct cable. MODEM: LiteEdit communication protocol via modem. MODBUS: Modbus protocol. See detailed description in InteliCommunication guide. ECU LINK: Protocol for communication with Cummins engines via Modbus. Hint: For details on communication speed and other technical parameters please see chapter Technical Data. For detail description see chapter Modbus protocol. Since IL-NT version 1.3 controller supports register oriented modbus.
COM2 Mode [DIRECT/MODBUS/ECU LINK]
Communication protocol switch for the COM2 channel, if dual communication module is pluged in. DIRECT: LiteEdit communication protocol via direct cable. MODBUS: Modbus protocol. See detailed description in InteliCommunication guide. ECU LINK: Protocol for communication with Cummins engines via Modbus. Hint: For details on communication speed and other technical parameters please see chapter Technical Data. For detail description see chapter Modbus protocol. Since IL-NT version 1.3 controller supports register oriented modbus. Hint: Modbus TCP protocol using IB-Lite communication module requires setting COM1 Mode = DIRECT and COM2 Mode = MODBUS.
ModemIniString
If your modem needs some additional initialization AT commands (i.e. because of national telephony network differencies), it can be entered here. Otherwise leave this setpoint blank.
ModbusComSpeed [9600,19200, 38400, 57600]
If the Modbus mode is selected on COM1 or COM2 channels, the Modbus communication speed in bps can be adjusted here.
IBLite IP Addr [-]
If DHCP is DISABLED this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the ethernet interface of the controller. Ask your IT specialist for help with this setting.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 64 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
If DHCP is ENABLED this setpoint is used to display the IP address, which has been assigned by the DHCP server.
IBLite NetMask [-]
If DHCP is DISABLED this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the ethernet interface of the controller. Ask your IT specialist for help with this setting. If DHCP is ENABLED this setpoint is used to display the IP address, which has been assigned by the DHCP server.
IBLite GateIP [-] If DHCP is DISABLED this setpoint is used to adjust the IP address of the gateway of the network segment where the controller is connected. If DHCP is ENABLED this setpoint is used to display the gateway IP address which has been assigned by the DHCP server. A gateway is a device which connects the respective segment with the other segments and/or Internet.
IBLite DHCP [ENABLED/DISABLED]
The setpoint is used to select the method how the ethernet connection is adjusted. DISABLED: The ethernet connection is adjusted fixedly according to the setpoints IP Addr, NetMask, GateIP, DNS IP Address. This method should be used for classic ethernet or Internet connection. When this type of connection is opening the controller is specified by it’s IP address. That means it would be inconvenient if the IP address were not fixed (static). ENABLED: The ethernet connection settings is obtained automatically from the DHCP server. The obtained settings is then copied to the related setpoints. If the process of obtaining the settings from DHCP server is not successful the value 000.000.000.000 is copied to the setpoint IP address and the module continues trying to obtain the settings.
ComAp Port [0 — 65535]
This setpoint is used to adjust the port number, which is used for ethernet connection to a PC with any of ComAp PC program (i.e. InteliLIte, InteliMonitor). This setpoint should be adjusted to 23, which is the default port used by all ComAp PC programs. A different value should be used only in special situations as e.g. sharing one public IP address among many controllers or to overcome a firewall restrictions.
APN Name [-]
Name of APN access point for GPRS network provided by GSM/GPRS operator.
APN User Name [-]
User name for APN access point provided by GSM/GPRS operator.
APN User Pass [-]
User password for APN access point provided by GSM/GPRS operator.
AirGate [ENABLED/DISABLED] This setpoint selects the ethernet connection mode.
DISABLED:
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 65 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
This is a standard mode, in which the controller listens to the incoming traffic and answers the TCP/IP queries addressed to him. This mode requires the controller to be accessible from the remote device (PC), i.e. it must be accessible at a public and static IP address if you want to connect to it from the Internet. ENABLED: This mode uses the «AirGate» service, which hides all the issues with static/public address into a black box and you do not need to take care about it. You just need only a connection to the Internet. The AirGate server address is adjusted by the setpoint AirGate IP.
AirGate IP [-]
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name or IP address of the AirGate server. Use the free AirGate server provided by ComAp at address airgate.comap.cz if your company does not operate it’s own AirGate server.
SMTP User Name [-]
Use this setpoint to enter the user name for the SMTP server.
SMTP User Pass [-]
Use this setpoint to enter the password for the SMTP server.
SMTP Server IP [-]
This setpoint is used for entering the domain name (e.g. smtp.yourprovider.com) or IP address (e.g. 74.125.39.109) of the SMTP server. Please ask your internet provider or IT manager for this information. Hint: You may also use one of free SMTP servers, e.g. smtp.gmail.com. However, please note that some free SMTP servers may cause delays (in hours..) when sending e-mails. If you do not want to send active e-mails, you may leave this setpoint blank, as well as other setpoints related to SMTP server and e-mail settings. Proper setting of SMTP-related setpoints as well as controller mailbox are essential for sending alerts via e-mails.
Contr Mail Box [-]
Enter an existing e-mail address into this setpoint. This address will be used as sender address in active e-mails that will be sent from the controller.
Time Zone [-]
This setpoint is used to select the time zone where the controller is located. See your computer time zone setting (click on the time indicator located in the rightmost position of the the windows task bar) if you are not sure about your time zone. Hint: If the time zone is not selected properly the active e-mails may contain incorrect information about sending time, which may result in confusion when the respective problem actually occured.
DNS IP Address [-]
If DHCP is DISABLED this setpoint is used to adjust the domain name server (DNS), which is needed to traslate domain names in e-mail addresses and server names into correct IP addresses. If DHCP is ENABLED this setpoint is used to display DNS server, which has been assigned by the DHCP server.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 66 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Engine Params
Starting RPM [%]
“Firing” speed when IL controller stops cranking (starter goes OFF). Step: 1% of nominal RPM Range: 5 – 50 %
Starting Oil P [Bar]
When reached controller stops cranking (starter goes OFF). Step: 0,1 bar Range: 0,0 – 10,0 Hint: There are three conditions for stop cranking: RPM > Starting RPM, Oil Pressure > Starting Oil P and D+ (when enabled) => 80% of battery voltage. Starter goes off when any of these conditions is vaid.
Prestart Time [s] Time of closing of the PRE-START output prior to the engine start. Set to zero if you want to leave the output PRE-START open. Step: 1s Range: 0 – 600 s
MaxCrank Time [s]
Maximum time limit of cranking. Step: 1s Range: 1 – 255 s
CrnkFail Pause [s]
Pause between crank attempts. Step: 1s Range: 5 – 60 s
Crank Attempts [-] Max number of crank attempts. Step: 1 Range: 1 – 10
Idle Time [s] Idle time delay starts when RPM exceeds Starting RPM. Start fail is detected when during Idle state RPM decreases below 2. During the Idle time timer running the binary output Idle/Nominal is opened when it elapses the Idle/Nominal output closes. Binary output Idle/Nominal opens during Cooling period again. Step: 1 s Range: 0 – 600 s
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 67 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Starting
RPM
RPM
BO Starter
BO IDLE/RATED
RPM = 2
RPM
Start Fail
Idle Time Min Stab TimeElectric protections
active
Min Stab Time [s]
Minimum time after reaching of defined level of RPM to the closing GCB. Step: 1s Range: 1 – 300 (Max Stab Time) s
Max Stab Time [s]
Maximum time after start to get proper voltage level of the generator. Step: 1s Range: 1 (Min stab time) – 300 s Hint: When generator voltage within Max Stab Time does not reach defined limits (Generator protection group) , an alarm occurs and the genset will shut down
Cooling Speed [IDLE/NOMINAL]
Selects the function of the Binary output IDLE/NOMINAL during engine Cooling state. NOMINAL : Cooling is executed at Nominal speed and generator protections are active. IDLE: Cooling is executed at Idle speed and generator protections are switched off. Hint: When ECU is connected the predefined value 900 RPM for IDLE speed is requested. Hint: Binary output IDLE/NOMINAL must be configured and connected to speed governor. Engine Idle speed must be adjusted on speed governor
Cooling Time [s]
Runtime of the unloaded gen-set to cool the engine before stop. Step: 1s Range: 0 – 3600 s Hint: Cooling is executed at nominal speed and generator protections are active.
Stop Time [s]
Under normal conditions the engine must certainly stop 10s before this period will exceed. The period starts by issuing stop command. Step: 1s Range: 0 – 600 s Hint: For more details see chapter „Stop engine“ conditions in chapter Gen-set Operation states
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 68 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Fuel Solenoid [ DIESEL / GAS ]
Determines behavior of the Binary output FUEL SOLENOID. DIESEL: Output closes 1 sec before Binary output STARTER.
The output opens if Emergency stop comes or Cooled gen-set is stopped and in pause between repeated starts.
GAS: Output closes together with Binary output IGNITION if RPM is over the 30 RPM (fix value). Output opens after stop command or in pause between repeated start.
D+ Function [ENABLED/CHRGFAIL/DISABLED]
ENABLED: The D+ terminal is used for both functions – “running engine” detection and charge fail detection. CHRGFAIL: The D+ terminal is used for charge fail detection only DISABLED: The D+ terminal is not used. Hint: The magnetization current is provided independently on this setpoint value. The D+ charge fail protection becomes active after Engine Params:Idle Time reaches zero.
ECU FreqSelect [PRIMARY/SECONDARY/DEFAULT]
This setpoint should be used only for Volvo and Scania engines. Volvo – “Volvo Aux” is selected in ECU configuration: Primary or secondary engine speed is set by Frequency select bits in VP Status frame. Scania – “Scania S6 Singlespeed” is selected in ECU configuration: Nominal engine speed is chosen by Nominal speed switch 1 and 2 from DLN1 frame when the engine is running on nominal speed, i.e. binary output Idle/Nominal is active. When the output is not active (engine is running on Idle speed), the setpoint ECU FreqSelect is not taken into account.
Frequency change for Volvo Penta engines with EMS2
This description refers to the Volvo Penta Application bulletin 30-0-003. The procedure for changing engine speed on the D9 and D16 engines is different from the D12 engine. There is no system reset on the EMS2 unit; therefore the procedure is changed. Procedure if ECU not energized:
1. Switch the IL controller to MAN Mode. 2. Power up the ECU. 3. Change the setpoint ECU FreqSelect and confirm it by pressing Enter 4. Press the Stop button on the IL controller.
The whole procedure (step 2 to 4) must not exceed 10 seconds. Procedure with ECU powered on:
1. Switch the IL controller to MAN Mode. 2. Press the Stop button on the IL controller. 3. Change the setpoint ECU FreqSelect and confirm it by pressing Enter 4. Press the Stop button on the IL controller.
The whole procedure (step 2 to 4) must not exceed 10 seconds.
ECU SpeedAdj [ % ]
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. Step: 1% Range: 0 – 100% Hint:
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 69 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
The minimum value 0% is equal to 90% of nominal speed. Maximum value 100% is equal to 110% of nominal speed.
Fuel Pump ON [%]
When the actual value of Fuel Level is lower or equals to this value then the binary output Fuel Pump is activated. Step: 1 Range: 0 – 100 %
Fuel Pump OFF [%] When the actual value of Fuel Level is higher or equals to this value then the binary output Fuel Pump is deactivated. Step: 1 Range: 0 – 100 % Hint: The two setpoints above are compared to Analog Input 3 (usually used for Fuel Level) It is a prerequisite for this function to use a fuel level sensor at this analog input.
TempSwitch ON [-]
Threshhold level for switching on the binary output TempSwitch. This function is connected with controller’s analog input 2. Step: 1 Range: -100 .. 10000 [-]
TempSwitchOFF [-]
Threshhold level for switching off the binary output TempSwitch. This function is connected with controller’s analog input 2. Step: 1 Range: -100 .. 10000 [-] Hint: The description of Power Switch function is in chapter Binary outputs — list at Temp Switch.
PowerSwitch ON [kW]
Threshold level for switching the binary output “Power Switch” on. Step: 1 Range: 0 – 32000 kW
PowerSwitchOFF [kW]
Threshold level for switching the binary output “Power Switch” off. Step: 1 Range: 0 – 32000 kW Hint: The description of Power Switch function is in chapter Binary outputs — list at Power Switch.
FuelTankVolume [l] Define a capacity of Genset fuel tank. Step: 1 Range: 1 – 10000l Hint: This setpoint have to be set properly to correct evaluation of Fuel Theft.
MaxFuelDrop [%/h]
Setpoint indicates the maximum allowable drop of fuel in fuel tank per running hour. Protection works also with still engine.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 70 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
In case of detection of theft/leak the alarm «Wrn FuelTheft» is raised and same alarm is send via SMS and displayed by WebSupervisor (if used). Step: 1 Range: 0 – 50% Hint: Set 0 to disable Fuel Theft Protection function into MaxFuelDrop setpoint.
Engine Protect
ProtectHoldOff [s]
During the start of the gen-set, some Engine Protections have to be blocked (e.g. Oil pressure). The protections are unblocked after the ProtectHoldOff time. The time starts after reaching Starting RPM. Step: 1s Range: 0 – 300 s Hint: The protections sequence diagram can be found in Alarm time chart in chapter Alarm Management. It displayes when and what protections are active.
Horn Timeout [s]
Max time limit of horn sounding. Set to zero if you want to leave the output HORN open. Horn timeout starts again from the beginning if a new alarm appears before previous Horn timeout has elapsed. Step: 1s Range: 0 – 600 s
Overspeed Sd [%]
Threshold for over speed protection Step: 1% of nominal RPM Range: 100 – 150% Hint: The Overspeed protection value is increasing by 10% of “Overspeed Sd” setpoint, e.g. from default 115 % to 125% of nominal RPM for the duration of 5sec (ProtectHoldOff delay). ProtectHoldOff delay takes place during the start of the gen-set when some engine protections have to be blocked. This delay starts after reaching 25% of nominal RPM. It holds true if the value Gear Teeth = 0.
AI1 Wrn [ Bar]
Warning threshold level for ANALOG INPUT 1 Step: 0,1 bar Range: -10 – 1000
AI1 Sd [ Bar] Shutdown threshold level for ANALOG INPUT 1 Step: 0,1 bar Range: -10 – 1000
AI1 Del [s]
Delay for ANALOG INPUT 1 Step: 1 s Range: 0 – 900 s Hint: First analog input is dedicated to Oil Pressure measurement. It is not supposed to be used for measurement of other values.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 71 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
AI2 Wrn [ ]
Warning threshold level for ANALOG INPUT 2
Step: 1 C Range: -100 – 10000
AI2 Sd [ ]
Shutdown threshold level for ANALOG INPUT 2
Step: 1 C Range: -100 – 10000
AI2 Del [s]
Delay for ANALOG INPUT 2 alarm. Step: 1 s Range: 0 – 900 s
AI3 Wrn [ ]
Warning threshold level for ANALOG INPUT 3 Step: 1 % Range: -100 – 10000
AI3 Sd [ ] Shutdown threshold level for ANALOG INPUT 3 Step: 1 % Range: -100 – 10000
AI3 Del [s]
Delay for ANALOG INPUT 3 Step: 1 s Range: 0 – 900 s
Batt Undervolt [V]
Warning threshold for low battery voltage. Step: 0,1 V Range: 8V – 40 (Battery >Volts)
Batt Overvolt [V]
Warning threshold for hi battery voltage. Step: 0,1 V Range: 8V – 40 (Battery <Volts)
Batt Volt Del [s]
Delay for low battery voltage alarm. Step: 1s Range: 0 – 600 s
WrnMaintenance [h]
Counts down when engine running. If reaches zero, an alarm appears. When the value 10000 is set, than the Maintanance function is disabled and counter does not count. Counter value disappear in controllers statictics. Maximum value for running countdown is 9999. Step: 1h Range: 0 – 10000 h
Gener Protect
Hint:
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 72 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
All electric protections when activated result in shutdown or BOC. The generator protections are evaluated from different voltages based on ConnectionType setting:
3W 4Ph – Ph-Ph voltage
3W 3Ph – Ph-Ph voltage
Split Ph – Ph-N voltage
Mono Ph – Ph-N voltage
Overload BOC [%]
Threshold for generator overload (in % of Nominal power) protection. Protection is BOC (Breaker Open and genset Cooldown). Step: 1% of Nominal power Range: 0 – 200%
Overload Del [s]
Delay for generator overload alarm. Step: 0.1s Range: 0 – 600.0 s
Short Crct BOC [ % ] BOC (Breaker Open and genset Cooldown) occurs when generator current reaches Short Crct BOC limit. Step: 1 % of Nominal current Range: 100 — 500 %
Short Crct Del [s]
Delay for generator shortcurrent alarm. Step: 0.04s Range: 0.00 – 10.00 s
*Amps IDMT Del [ s ] IDMT curve shape selection. Amps IDMT Del is Reaction time of IDMT protection for 200% overcurrent Igen = 2* Nomin Current. Step: 0,1 s Range: 0,1 — 60,0 s IDMT is “very inverse” generator over current protection. Reaction time is not constant but depends on generator over current level according following formula.
Hint: Reaction time is limited up to 3600 sec = 1 hour. IDMT protection is not active for Reaction time values longer than 1 hour. Igen is maximal value of all measured phases of generator current. EXAMPLE of Reaction time for different over current levels. Values in column 200% are IDMT Curr Del.
Amps IDMT Del * Nomin Current Reaction time =
Igen — Nomin Current
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 73 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Igen
Nominal Current Short Crct Sd
Amps IDMT Del
Maximal Reaction time
Reacti
on
tim
e
Amps Unbal BOC [%]
Threshold for generator current asymmetry (unbalance). Protection is BOC (Breaker Open and genset Cooldown). Step: 1% of Nominal current Range: 1 – 200% of Nominal current
Amps Unbal Del [s]
Delay for generator current unbalance Step: 0.1 s Range: 0.0 – 600.0 s
Gen >V Sd [%]
Threshold for generator overvoltage. All three phases are checked. Maximum out of three is used. Step: 1% of Nominal voltage Range: 0(Gen <V BOC) – 200%
Gen <V BOC [%]
Threshold for generator undervoltage. All three phases are checked. Minimum out of three is used. Step: 1% of Nominal voltage Range: 0% – 200 (Gen >V Sd)% Hint:
Overcurrent
200 % = IDMT Curr
Del
≤ 100 % 101 % 110 %
Reaction time
0,2 s No action 20 s 2 s
2 s No action 200 s 20 s
20 s No action 2000 s 200 s
40 s No action No action (Reaction
time ≥ 1 hour)
400 s
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 74 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Over- and undervoltage protection is evaluated according to Basic Settings: ConnectionType setting. 3Ph4Wire and 3Ph3Wire connections are evaluated according to Ph-Ph nominal voltage (NomVolts Ph-Ph) and Split Phase and Mono Phase connections are evaluated according to Ph-N nominal voltage (NomVolts Ph-N).
Gen V Del [s]
Delay for generator undervoltage and overvoltage alarm Step: 0.1s Range: 0.0 – 600.0 s
Volt Unbal BOC [%] Threshold for generator voltage unbalance alarm. Step: 1% of Nominal voltage Range: 0 – 200% of Nominal voltage
Volt Unbal Del [s]
Delay for generator voltage unbalance alarm. Step: 0.1s Range: 0.0 – 600.0 s
Gen >Freq BOC [%]
Threshold for generator phase L1 overfrequency. Step: 0.1% of Nominal frequency Range: 0 (Gen <Freq BOC) – 200.0% of Nominal frequency
Gen <Freq BOC [%]
Threshold for generator phase L1 underfrequency. Step: 0.1% of Nominal frequency Range: 0.0 – 200 (Gen >Freq BOC ) % of Nominal frequency
Gen Freq Del [s]
Delay for generator underfrequency and overfrequency alarm. Step: 0.1s Range: 0.0 – 600.0 s
*Extension I/O
IOM AI1..4 Wrn [ ]
The warning level for IOM ANALOG INPUT 1..4 alarm detection. Step: 1 Range: -100 — +10000
IOM AI1..4 Sd [ ]
The shutdown level for IOM ANALOG INPUT 1..4 alarm detection. Step: 1 Range: -100 — +10000
IOM AI1..4 Del [s]
Delay for IOM ANALOG INPUT 1..4 alarm. Step: 1 s Range: 0 — 900 s Hint: IG-IOM/IGS-PTM analog inputs protection alarms can be configured following way
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 75 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Configuration Protection
Under Protection is activated only when measured value is under measured level.
Over Protection is activated only when measured value is over measured level.
Under+fls Level 2 protection is activated by Sensor Fail as well.
Over+fls Level 2 protection is activated by Sensor Fail as well.
IOM AI1..4 Calibr […]
Calibrating constant to adjust the measured value of IOM/PTM analog inputs. Physical dimension of calibrating constant is corresponding to Analog input. Step: 1 Range: -1000 – +1000
Date/Time
Some of parameters in this group are only available at specific models of IL-NT.
*Time Stamp Per [min]
Time interval for periodic history records. Step: 1 min Range: 0 – 200min Hint: Time stamps are only recorded into history while gen-set is running. When is engine stopped there are no time stamps records made.
*#SummerTimeMod [ DISABLED / WINTER / SUMMER,WINTER- S, SUMMER-S ]
DISABLED: Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is disabled. WINTER (SUMMER) : Automatic switching between summer and wintertime is enabled and it is set to winter (summer) season. WINTER-S (SUMMER-S) : Modification for southern hemisphere.
*#Time [HHMMSS]
Actual real time
*#Date [DDMMYYYY]
Actual date.
*Timer1..2Function [No Func/Auto Run/Mode OFF]
It is possible to choose out of 3 following Timer functions. Binary output Exerc Timer X is always activated when Timer is active regardless of chosen Timer function. Timer functions require controller running in AUT mode. No Func: There is no any other function, but binary output Timer1..2 activation. Auto Run: When this option is chosen then the Timer output is also internally connected to the
Remote start binary input. Mode OFF: When this option is chosen then the Timer output is also internally connected to the
Remote OFF binary input.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 76 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
*Timer 1..2 Repeat [NONE/MONDAY/TUESDAY/WEDNESDAY/THURSDAY/WEDNESDAY/FRIDAY/SATURDAY/SUNDAY/MON-FRI/MON-SAT/MON-SUN/SAT-SUN]
Defines TIMER 1,2 activation. Binary output TIMER 1,2 is internally linked with Rem Start/Stop binary input. Refer to binary outputs Exerc Timer X and particular binary inputs related to setpoint Timer1..2Function for details. NONE: Timer function is disabled MONDAY, TUESDAY, WEDNESDAY, THURSDAY, WEDNESDAY, FRIDAY, SATURDAY, SUNDAY: Timer is activated on daily basis. MON-FRI, MON-SAT, SAT-SUN: Timer is activated on selected day interval.
*Timer1..2 ON Time
Day time when Timer output activates.
*Timer1..2Duration
Duration of Timer output is active. Step: 1 min Range: 1 – 1440 s
Test Period
Duration of testing run timer. This timer will run the engine with specified period for specified time duration.Timer starts at time of restarting the controller, or during start of engine with transition from Idle to Running state. This setpoint is only available at models IL-NT MRS10 and MRS11. Step: 1 day Range: 1 – 240 days
Test Duration
Duration of testing run of engine. This setpoint is only available at models IL-NT MRS10 and MRS11. Step: 1 min Range: 1 – 240 min
Sensors spec
AI1, AI2, AI3 Calibration […]
Calibrating constant to adjust the measured value of IL analog inputs. Physical dimension of calibrating constant is corresponding to Analog input. Step: 1 Range: -1000 – +1000 Hint: Calibration constants have to be adjusted when measured value is near the alarm level. User curves can be defined by LiteEdit software.
SMS/E-Mail
Remote alarm messaging
If a GSM modem and/or Internet bridge is connected to the controller, the controller can send SMS messages and/or emails in the moment when a new alarm appears in the Alarm list. The message will contain a copy of the Alarm list.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 77 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
To enable this function, you should select with setpoints Yel Alarm Msg and Red Alarm Msg, which levels of alarms shall be announced (red/yellow/both) and also enter valid GSM phone number and/or e-mail address to the setpoints TelNo/Addr Ch1 and TelNo/Addr Ch2. It is possible to put either a GSM number or e-mail to both setpoints.
NOTE: An internet module must be available for sending of e-mails. Similarly, a GSM modem is necessary for sending of SMS. Hint: There are 5 attempts for any active call (SMS/E-Mail). Timeout for connection is 90 sec and after 120 sec controller starts the next attempt. During the time the IL-NT is trying to send an active call type, incoming calls are blocked.
Yel Alarm Msg [ON/OFF] Set this setpoint to ON if you want to get messages when a yellow (warning) alarm occurs.
Hint:
The target address (GSM phone number or e-mail address) must be set correctly to the setpoint(s) TelNo/Addr Ch1 resp. TelNo/Addr Ch2.
Red Alarm Msg [ON/OFF] Set this setpoint to ON if you want to get messages when a red (shutdown or BOC) alarm occurs.
Hint: The target address (GSM phone number or e-mail address) must be set correctly to the setpoint(s) TelNo/Addr Ch1 resp. TelNo/Addr Ch2.
Event Msg [ON/OFF]
Set this setpoint to ON if you want to get messages when a new event occur .
Hint: The target address (GSM phone number or e-mail address) must be set correctly to the setpoint(s) TelNo/Addr Ch1 resp. TelNo/Addr Ch2.
TelNo/Addr Ch1, 2
Enter either a valid GSM phone number or e-mail address to this setpoint, where the alarm messages shall be sent. Type of active call is considered from the value of this parameter. If it consist „@“ it is supposed to be e-mail address and active e-mail is sent. If the value is number, without „@“, it is supposed to be the telephone number and active SMS is sent.
Hint: For GSM numbers use either national format (i.e. like number you will dial if you want to make a local call) or full international format with «+» character followed by international prefix in the begin.
Phone numbers and emails can be modified from controller display or from PC. Following buttons are used for phone number modification
— ENTER for — opening the modification
— confirmation of particular number change and jump to the next position — confirmation of the last number and closing of the modification
— MODE for — while adjusting character press Mode button to jump between character groups to
fasten the process.
— and for — particular number/character change
Particular numbers/character can take values: from “0” to “9”, “a” to “z”, various symbols and empty space.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 78 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
SMS Language [1/2]
Select 1 to receive a messages in primary controller language or 2 for secondary one.
Alternate Cfg
Based on the value on BI Alt. Config is selected controller configuration 1 or configuration 2 (all related setpoints are placed in Alternate Cfg group). Hint: Controller will react on change of binary input only while engine is stopped. On successful change of input the new record in history («Nominal1Active», «Nominal2Active») is added. Hint: If the configuration 1 will contain setting for 50Hz and configuration 2 for 60Hz it is possible to use this feature for 50/60 Hz switch.
Nominal RPM 1..2 [RPM]
Nominal engine speed. Step: 1RPM Range: 100 – 4000 RPM
Nominal Freq 1..2 [Hz] Nominal generator frequency (usually 50 or 60 Hz ) Step: 1Hz Range: 45 – 65 Hz
NomVolts Ph-N 1..2 [V]
Nominal generator voltage (phase to neutral) Step: 1V Range: 80 – 20000 V Hint:
Phase sequence check is not possible to evaluate under voltage 50V what causes that if measured voltage 50V is within the allowed range, controller will not allow to close the GCB, even if relevant LED diod on front panel of IL-NT lits.
NomVolts Ph-Ph1..2 [V]
Nominal generator voltage (phase to phase) Step: 1V Range: 138 – 35000 V
Nomin Current 1..2 [A]
It is current limit for generator *IDMT over current and short current protection and means maximal continuous generator current. See Gener Protect: *Amps IDMT Del, Short Crct Sd setpoints. Nominal Current can be different from generator rated current value. Step: 1 A Range: 1 — 10000 A
ConnectionType 1..2 [3Ph4Wire / 3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph]
Generator winding connection. 3Ph4Wire: STAR Connection, 3 phases and neutral — 4 wires,
Three phase “wye” measurement – 3PY, 3x CT‘s 3Ph3Wire: DELTA Connection, 3 Phase without neutral — 3 Wires,
Three phase “delta” measurement – 3PD, 3x CT‘s Split Phase: DOUBLE DELTA Connection, Split Phase,
Single-phase measurement – 1PH, 1xCT Mono Phase: MONOPHASE,
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 79 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Single-phase measurement – 1PH, 1x CT Hint: For more details about connection types see Voltage measurement and generator connection types chapter. For details about influence of Connection type setting on voltage values in history check History file chapter.
ECU FreqSelect1..2 [PRIMARY/SECONDARY/DEFAULT]
This setpoint should be used only for Volvo and Scania engines. Volvo – “Volvo Aux” is selected in ECU configuration: Primary or secondary engine speed is set by Frequency select bits in VP Status frame. Scania – “Scania S6 Singlespeed” is selected in ECU configuration: Nominal engine speed is chosen by Nominal speed switch 1 and 2 from DLN1 frame when the engine is running on nominal speed, i.e. binary output Idle/Nominal is active. When the output is not active (engine is running on Idle speed), the setpoint ECU FreqSelect is not taken into account.
Frequency change for Volvo Penta engines with EMS2
This description refers to the Volvo Penta Application bulletin 30-0-003. The procedure for changing engine speed on the D9 and D16 engines is different from the D12 engine. There is no system reset on the EMS2 unit; therefore the procedure is changed. Procedure if ECU not energized:
5. Switch the IL controller to MAN Mode. 6. Power up the ECU. 7. Change the setpoint ECU FreqSelect and confirm it by pressing Enter 8. Press the Stop button on the IL controller.
The whole procedure (step 2 to 4) must not exceed 10 seconds. Procedure with ECU powered on:
5. Switch the IL controller to MAN Mode. 6. Press the Stop button on the IL controller. 7. Change the setpoint ECU FreqSelect and confirm it by pressing Enter 8. Press the Stop button on the IL controller.
The whole procedure (step 2 to 4) must not exceed 10 seconds.
ECU SpeedAdj 1..2 [ % ]
Enables to adjust engine speed in ECU via CAN bus. Nominal speed corresponds to 50%. Step: 1% Range: 0 – 100% Hint: The minimum value 0% is equal to 90% of nominal speed. Maximum value 100% is equal to 110% of nominal speed.
*EarthFaultProt
Hint: More information are availible in Earth fault Measurement chapter.
EF Protection [ENABLED/DISABLED]
This setpoint can block or allow Earth fault Current protection.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 80 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
EF CT Ratio [/1A]
Earth Fault current transformer ratio. Step: 1 A Range: 1 – 2000 A / 1A
EarthFault Sd [A]
Shutdown threshold level for Earth Fault current. Step: 0,01A Range: 0,03 – 5 A
EarthFault Del [s]
Earth Fault current measurement delay. Step: 0,01s Range: 1 – 5s
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 81 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
*ECU-controlled engine support
There exists only one firmware branch for both standard and electronic controlled (monitored) engines. Presence of the ECU on the CAN bus/RS232 is configured via LiteEdit like other peripheries (IG-IOM,
IGL-RA15). Pressing the button in Configuration window of LiteEdit opens ECU dialog window where the appropriate engine/ECU type should be selected. The actual list of ECU types is available on ComAp website in «ECU list — x.y.iwe» package. Download this package and import it into LiteEdit in the same way as standard firmware IWE package. More information about ECU list packages, configuration and wiring recommendations can be found in Comap Electronic Engines Support manual.
If the connected engine is Cummins with GCS engine control unit communicating via Modbus it is
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 82 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
necessary to set the setpoint Basic settings: COM1 Mode = ECU LINK or COM2 Mode = ECU LINK. Loss of communication causes a warning alarm. On the contrary the ECU can be switched off at quiescent engine that means not-communicating ECU is in that moment normal situation. All values from ECU shall show ####, but no alarm is displayed. The output ECU Comm OK follows the real situation which means it is not active anytime when the ECU does not communicate.
The output ECU PowerRelay closes at the beginning of prestart and opens if the engine shall be stopped. It can be used to switch the ECU on and off. If the putput is configured but not active the ECU communication alarm is blocked.
The engine is started via standard contact output or via CAN bus depending on ECU capabilities.
Identifying configured ECU
It is possible to identify what ECU is currently configured in IL-NT (FW version ≥1.5) controller on init
screens. Navigate to default screen with gauge and press buttons PAGE and ENTER at the same
time. Than browse through inits screen by button PAGE until you find value «ESF:xx.y — (zzz)», where
xx.y = ESF version number, zzz= Motor ID. Explanation of Motor ID is in table below:
Motor ID ESF — Electronic Engine
1 Volvo EMSI Singlespeed / EMSII
3 Scania S6 Singlespeed
4 Cummins CM570
5 Cummins MODBUS
7 John Deere
8 Deutz EMR2
9 DDC DDEC IV/V
10 Caterpillar J1939
12 Perkins ECM
14 Iveco NEF&Cursor
16 Scania S6 Singlespeed from ver.1794335
18 SISU EEM3 Gen-set
20 MTU ADEC J1939
23 JCB Delphi DCM
24 Daimler Chrysler ADM2
25 Deutz EMR3
26 Cummins CM850
28 Iveco Vector
29 MAN MFR
31 VM Marine
32 VM Industrial
35 GM SECM
36 ISUZU ECM
43 Cummins CM850/CM2150/CM2250
44 GM e-control ECU
58 GM e-control LCI
60 MTU SMART Connect
68 Scania S8 Singlespeed
71 GM MEFI6
255 Standard J1939 engine
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 83 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Values read from ECU
There is fixed set of values read from J1939 ECU by IL-NT controller: Engine speed (frame EEC1) Engine oil pressure (frame Engine Fluid Level/Pressure) Engine coolant temperature (frame Engine Temperature) Total engine hours (frame Engine Hours, Revolutions) Fuel rate (frame Fuel Economy) Boost pressure (frame Inlet/Exhaust Conditions) Intake manifold 1 temperature (frame Inlet/Exhaust Conditions) Engine oil temperature 1 (frame Engine Temperature 1)
When “ECU LINK”-Modbus option is selected, following values are read from Modbus Register Data (for QSX15,QSK45, QSK60):
Engine Speed (Register Address:30001) Oil Pressure (Register Address:30003) Coolant Temperature (Register Address:30002) Engine Running Time (Register Address:30008-30009) Fuel Consumption Rate (Register Address:30018) Intake Manifold Absolute Pressure (Register Address:30530 (QSK45, QSK60 only)) Intake Manifold Temperature (Register Address:30531 (QSK45, QSK60 only))
Hint: Values read from ECU are not written to history besides the fault codes.
Diagnostic messages read from ECU
Diagnostic messages are read and displayed in extra ECU Alarm list. For Standard J1939 SPN (Suspect Parameter Number), FMI (Failure Mode Identifier) and OC (Occurrence Counter) are shown together with text description if available. One SPN (Suspect Parameter Number) / FMI (Failure Mode Identify) couple describes one fail information. If FMI is equal to 0 or 1, WRN is displayed in the ECU Alarm list. For any other FMI values, FLS is displayed. Detail SPN/FMI code specification see in:
SAE Truck and Bus Control and Communications Network Standards Manual, SAE HS-1939 Publication
Or refer to corresponding engine manufacturer’s ECU error codes list. Complete list of text diagnostic messages for each ECU can be found in Comap Electronic Engines Support manual. Hint: InteliLite controller doesn’t support J1587 diagnostic line on Volvo engines. This can cause in some cases a J1939 alarm message FC:000608 due to missing J1587 bus. Contact your Volvo distributor to update ECU firmware. For Scania engines the fault codes are displayed in hexadecimal format.
Analog inputs
Reading of mentioned values from ECU enables to use analog inputs of the unit for other purposes, e.g. measuring, displaying and alarm activation related to various quantities. The configuration thus allows to use three analog inputs on the central unit and four analog inputs on IG-IOM/IGS-PTM module if connected.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 84 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Connection description
The following diagrams show how to connect the engine control unit to the InteliLite controller:
Engines with J1939 support started via CAN bus VOLVO PENTA engines (EMS II, EDC III units)
LO
AD
DIE
SE
L/G
AS
EN
GIN
E
RPM
GE
NE
RA
TO
R
G
+24
V
Genera
tor
C.B
.
RS
-23
2C
Inte
rfa
ce
Mod
em
orP
C
ALARM
BIN
AR
YO
UT
PU
TS
GEN C.B.
PRESTART
READY TO LOAD
FUEL LEVEL
EC
U
8-p
ole
De
uts
ch
con
nect
or
8
7
6 5
4 3
2 1
BO ECU PwrRelayBO ECU CommOK ( EDCIII) / ECU CommError ( EMSII)
EMERGENCY STOP
CONTROLSIGNALS
REMOTE S/S
ACCESS LOCK
NOT USED
REMOTE OFF
SPRINKLER
L1
L2
L3 N
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 85 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
SCANIA S6 L
OA
D
DIE
SE
L/G
AS
EN
GIN
E
RPM
GE
NE
RA
TO
R
+24
V
Genera
tor
C.B
.
RS
-23
2C
Inte
rfa
ce
Mod
em
orP
C
FUEL LEVEL
EC
U
10
-pin
EM
S B
1con
nect
or
3
4
56
7 8
9 1
02
1 + 24 V DC
GND
ALARM
BIN
AR
YO
UT
PU
TS
GEN C.B.
PRESTART
READY TO LOAD
L1
L2
L3 N
G
EMERGENCY STOP
CONTROLSIGNALS
REMOTE S/S
ACCESS LOCK
NOT USED
REMOTE OFF
SPRINKLER
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 86 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Cummins engines with MODBUS communication InteliLite set up: Basic settings: COM1 Mode = ECU LINK or COM2 Mode = ECU LINK Software configuration: ECU → ECU engine is connected → Type: Cummins MODBUS RS232/RS485 converter (see following diagram) set up: Data format settings (SW1) 11 bits (1 start bit, 8 data bits, 2 stop bits) Baud rate settings (SW2) 9600 bps (more info available on http://www.advantech.com/products/Model_Detail.asp?model_id=1-D6FLH)
LO
AD
DIE
SE
L/G
AS
EN
GIN
E
RPM
GE
NE
RA
TO
R
G
+24
V
Genera
tor
C.B
.
ALARM
BIN
AR
YO
UT
PU
TS
.
GEN C.B.
PRESTART
READY TO LOAD
STARTER
BATTERY
— +
FUEL SOLENOID
D+
FUEL SOLENOID
STARTER
EC
U
10-30
VDC
GND
RxDTxD
ADAM 4520 RS232/485
CONVERTER
DATA1+
DATA1-RS232
RS485
D-S
UB
06
CO
NN
EC
TO
R RS 485 — ( PIN 18)
GND ( PIN 20)
RS 485 + ( PIN 21)
TERM2 ( PIN 19)
TERM1 ( PIN 22)
L1
L2
L3 N
EMERGENCY STOP
CONTROLSIGNALS
REMOTE S/S
ACCESS LOCK
NOT USED
REMOTE OFF
SPRINKLER
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 87 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Sensor Specification
Background of the sensor calibration
To correct measuring error of each analog input (pressure, temperature, level) calibrating constants within 10 % of measure range should be set. Two calibrating constants are set in physical units — bar,
oC, % .Calibration is made by adding the value of setpoint AIxCalibration directly to the calculated
value at analog input. Hint: The calibration must be done at the operational point of the analog input (e.g. 80°C, 4.0Bar etc..)
Default sensor curves
There are 20 default resistive curves available. The following table provides information on minimum/maximum values of respective sensors. Actual values especially of temperature curves may differ. Meaning is to prolong curve to the lower temperature values, so the cold engine will not raise alarm fail sensor.
Curve Min Value Max Value Unit
Datcon 5 Bar 0 5 Bar
Datcon 7 Bar 0 7 Bar
Datcon 10 Bar 0 10 Bar
Datcon 80 Psi 0 80 Psi
Datcon 100 Psi 0 100 Psi
Datcon 150 Psi 0 150 Psi
Datcon Low °C 25 150 °C
Datcon High °C 25 160 °C
Datcon Low °F 80 300 °F
Datcon High °F 80 320 °F
Datcon Fuel % 0 100 %
VDO 5 Bar 0 5 Bar
VDO 10 Bar 0 10 Bar
VDO 72 Psi 0 72 Psi
VDO 145 Psi 0 145 Psi
VDO 40-120 °C 40 120 °C
VDO 50-150 °C 50 150 °C
VDO 100-250 °F 100 250 °F
VDO 120-300°F 120 300 °F
VDO Fuel % 0 100 %
Hint: You can find detail information on sensors in LiteEdit Reference Guide and details about sensor fails in this manual in chapter Alarm Management — Sensor Fail (FLS).
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 88 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Function Description
OFF Mode
No start of the gen-set is possible. Outputs STARTER, GCB CLOSE/OPEN and FUEL SOLENOID are not energized.
No reaction if buttons START,STOP,^GCB ON/OFF are pressed.
MAN Mode
START. — starts the gen-set.
^GCB ON/OFF
The controller closes GCB.
The controller opens GCB when closed.
If the generator voltage is out of the limits, the controller does not to respond to the GCB
ON/OFF
STOP stops the gen-set.
Hint: The engine can run without load unlimited time. The controller does not automatically stop the running gen-set in MAN Mode. The controller does not start the gen-set when binary input REM START/STOP is closed.
Start-stop sequence (simplified)
MODE = MAN (Engine start/stop request is given by pressing buttons START and STOP )
MODE = AUT (Engine start/stop request is evaluated form Mains failure/return)
State Condition of the transition Action Next state
Ready Start request PRESTART on Prestart Time counter started
Prestart
RPM > 2 or Oil pressure > Starting OilP detected or Gen voltage > 10V
Stop (Stop fail)
OFF Mode selected or Shut down alarm active
Not Ready
Not Ready RPM < 2, Oil pressure not detected, Vgen < 10V, D+ not Active no shutdown alarm active, other than OFF Mode selected
Ready
Prestart 3
Prestart time elapsed STARTER on FUEL SOLENOID on
4
MaxCrank Time counter started
Cranking
Cranking 3 RPM> Starting RPM STARTER off
PRESTART off
Starting
D+ input activated or oil pressure detected or Gen voltage > 25% Vgnom or D+ active for 1s
STARTER off PRESTART off
Cranking
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 89 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
State Condition of the transition Action Next state
MaxCrank Time elapsed, 1st attempt STARTER off FUEL SOLENOID off STOP SOLENOID on CrankFail Pause timer started
Crank pause
MaxCrank Time elapsed, last attempt STARTER off PRESTART off
Shutdown (Start fail)
Crank pause
3
CrankFail Pause elapsed STARTER on FUEL SOLENOID on
4
STOP SOLENOID off MaxCrank Time counter started
Cranking
Starting 3 80% Nominal RPM reached READY TO LOAD on
1
Min, Max Stab Time counter started
Running
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown condition FUEL SOLENOID off STOP SOLENOID on
Shutdown
60 sec. Elapsed FUEL SOLENOID off STOP SOLENOID on
Shutdown (Start fail)
Running Stop request READY TO LOAD off Cooling Time timer started
Cooling
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown condition READY TO LOAD off 2
FUEL SOLENOID off Shutdown
GCB CLOSE/OPEN closed Loaded
Loaded GCB CLOSE/OPEN opened Running
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown condition FUEL SOLENOID off STOP SOLENOID on READY TO LOAD off
Shutdown
Cooling
Cooling Time elapsed FUEL SOLENOID off STOP SOLENOID on
Stop
RPM = 0 or any other shutdown condition FUEL SOLENOID off STOP SOLENOID on
Shutdown
Start request READY TO LOAD on 1
Running
Stop RPM = 0, Oil pressure not detected, Vgen < 10V, D+ not active
Ready
If at least one of engine running indication is detected when Setpoint Stop Time elapsed. See more details in chapter Gen-Set Operation state – Stop engine conditions
Stop (Stop fail)
1 if all generator parameters OK and Min Stab Time elapsed, indicates that GCB is possible to close.
In AUTO Mode closes in this moment GCB automatically. 2 If GCB output used GCB opens automatically
3 The start-up sequence can be interrupted in any time by comming stop request
4 Fuel solenoid is switched on with time advance of 1s fixed before starter motor is switched on.
Hint: Threshold level for D+ input is 80% supply voltage, activation delay is 1s (to override short firings during cranking – for example in cold conditions).
AUT mode
The controller does not respond to buttons START, STOP, GCB ON/OFF. Engine start/stop request
is given by binary input REM START/STOP.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 90 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Alarm Management
Following alarms are available:
Sensor Fail
Warning
Breakers open and cooling (BOC)
Shut down
Mains failure
Sensor Fail (FLS)
Sensor Fail of analog inputs is detected in three ways. First when measured resistance value is lower than half of the lowest point of sensor characteristics. Second when measured resistance value is higher than 112,5% of highest point of sensor characteristics. Or when data from ECU are missing. Sensor Fail is indicated by ##### symbol instead measured value. Sensor Fail is only evaluated for values of sensor curve within range 1..14999Ohm. When the sensor characteristic curve consists values “0” or “15000”, the sensor fault for shortcircuit/sensor fail is not evaluated. Maximum allowable resistance value for sensor characteristics is 15000 Ohms.
Warning (WRN)
When warning comes up, only alarm outputs and common warning output are closed.
Possible warnings:
See List of possible events
Breaker open and cooling (BOC)
When the BOC alarm comes up, IL-NT opens first output GCB CLOSE/ to unload the gen-set and then after cooling time it also stops the gen-set. Alarm outputs and common shutdown output are activated. Active or not acknowledged protection disables gen-set start.
Possible BOC alarms:
See List of possible events
R1
R2
R3
R4 R5
Range of sensor
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 91 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Shut down (SD)
When the shut-down alarm comes up, InteliLite opens outputs GCB CLOSE/OPEN, FUEL SOLENOID, STARTER and PRESTART to stop the engine immediately. Alarm outputs and common shutdown output are closed. Active or not reset protection disables start.
Possible shut-down alarms:
See List of possible events
Alarm time chart
«All the time» configured protections, I >, I >>, RPM >>, mains failure detection
GC
B o
pened
«Engine running only» protections, engine
water temperature luboil pressure
Underspeed
Sto
p
Sta
rt
Sta
rte
r O
FF
ProtectHoldoff
Sw
itched
to
nom
ina
l spe
ed
Min
Sta
b T
ime
GC
B c
lose
d
Max S
tab T
ime
Gen >V, <V,
>Freq, <FreqIdle Time
5 sec
Voltage phase sequence detection
InteliLite controller detects phase sequence on generator voltage terminals. This protection is important after controller installation to avoid wrong voltage phases phase connection. Following alarms can be detected:
Wrong phase sequence
There is fix defined phase sequence in InteliLite controller L1, L2, L3. When the phases are connected in different order (e.g. L1,L3,L2 or L2,L1,L3) following alarms are detected:
Gen CCW Rot = wrong generator phase sequence
GCB fail detection
GCB fail detection is based on binary output GCB close/open comparing with binary input GCB FEEDBACK. There are three different time delays for GCB fail detection – see following diagrams. When is BO GCB close/open in steady state and GCB feedback is changed the GCB fail is detected immediately (no delay).
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 92 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Alarm: GCB fail
BO GCB close/open
BI GCB feedback
Alarm detection:
immediatelly
active
closed
opened
Alarm: GCB fail
BI GCB feedback
BO GCB close/open
Alarm detection:
immediatelly
active
opened
closed
When BO GCB close/open opens there is 5 sec delay for GCB fail detection.
Alarm: GCB fail
BO GCB close/open
BI GCB feedback
active
opened
opened
Time delay
5 sec
When BO GCB close/open closes, there is 5sec delay for GCB fail detection:
Alarm: GCB fail
BO GCB close/open
BI GCB feedback
active
closed
closed
Time delay
5 or 2 sec
Hint: You can solve state of GCB fail by pressing Fault Reset button. Generally it is possible to use IL-NT controller without feedback inputs (not configured). Controller will work with breakers anyway.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 93 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Gen-set Operation States
Engine state machine
Init Autotest during controller power on.
Not ready Gen-set is not ready to start. For example when shutdown alarm is active or unit is in OFF mode.
Prestart Prestart sequence in process, Prestart output is closed. Usually used for preheating or processes executed prior gen-set start.
Cranking Engine is cranking. Starter output is closed
Pause Pause between start attempts.
Starting Starting speed is reached and the Idle timer is running.
Running Gen-set is running at nominal speed.
Loaded Gen-set is running at nominal speed and GCB OPEN/CLOSE is closed.
Stop Stop. Automatic or manual stop command was issued, engine is stopping.
Shutdowns Shut-down alarm activated.
Ready Gen-set is ready to run.
Cooling Gen-set is cooling before stop.
EmergMan Emergency Manual gen-set operation. Used for bypass the controller and engine manual start.
“Engine started” conditions Engine speed (RPM) > Starting RPM or AI: Oil press > Starting POil or D+ terminal active (reached 80% of supply voltage) for minimum 1s or Generator voltage > 25% of NomVolts Ph-N or NomVolts Ph-Ph (any phase) Any of these condition will disconnect starter of the engine, however for transition to next state RPM needs to be higher than Starting RPM.
“Engine running” conditions RPM > 2 RPM or Analog input Oil pressure > Engine params: Starting POil or Vgen > 10 V (any phase).
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 94 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
“Still engine” conditions
Engine speed (RPM) <= 1 RPM AI: Oil press < Starting POil Generator voltage < 10V (all phases) When the engine was running before and all above conditions are fulfilled, additional 2s delay is necessary to confirm “still engine”. When any engine running conditiones are appeared on still engine than the Wrn Stop Fail is activated with following delay: — for generator voltage < 50% of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1s — for generator voltage > 50% of nominal voltage, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 200ms — for oil pressure > starting oil pressure, Wrn Stop Fail has delay 1s — for detected RPM, there is no delay.
“Stop engine”conditions
If no engine running conditions are validated than the controller will wait extra 10s before leaving the Machine state Stop and than it will release the Binary output Stop solenoid.
Fuel Solenoid is opened
Gen-set stoped
On
Off
TimeStop
Engine run 10 s
Oil Pressure
Stop SolenoidOutput
Generator voltage
Cooling Time
D+
RPM / Frequency
Stop Time
When the total time of stopping will exceed setpoint Stop time (in Engine Params) than the Stop fail warning and related binary outputs are activated. The controller will continuously try to stop the engine.
Fuel Solenoid is opened
Gen-set stoped
On
Off
TimeStop
Engine run 10 s
Oil Pressure
Stop SolenoidOutput
Generator voltage
Cooling Time
D+
RPM / Frequency
Stop Time
Stop Fail Warning
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 95 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Electric state machine
MinStabTO Minimal Stabilization Timeout
MaxStabTO Maximal Stabilization Timeout
Trans Del Forward return break delay. Delay between GCB opening and MCB closing
List of possible events
Events specification Protection
type
Information on binary output available (See list of Binary outputs)
Description
AI1 Wrn WRN YES Value measured on analog input 1 is lower than AI1 Wrn setpoint.
AI1 Sd SD YES Value measured on analog input 1 is lower than AI1 Sd setpoint.
AI2 Wrn WRN YES Value measured on analog input 2 is greater than AI2 Wrn setpoint.
AI2 Sd SD YES Value measured on analog input 2 is greater than AI2 Sd setpoint.
AI3 Wrn WRN YES Value measured on analog input 3 is greater than AI3 Wrn setpoint.
AI3 Sd SD YES Value measured on analog input 3 is greater than AI3 Sd setpoint.
Wrn Batt Volt WRN YES Battery voltage is out of limits given by Batt Undervolt/Batt OverVolt setpoints.
IOM AIx Wrn WRN YES Warning alarm configurable on the input of IG-IOM/IGS-PTM.
IOM AIx Sd SD YES Shutdown alarm configurable on the input of IG-IOM/IGS-PTM.
Binary input Configurable YES Configurable Warning/BOC/Shutdown alarms on the inputs of IL-NT.
Sd BatteryFlat SD YES If the controller switches off during starting sequence due to bad battery condition it doesn’t try to start again and activates this protection.
Sd Start Fail SD YES Gen-set start failed. All crank attempts were tried without success.
ParamFail NONE NO Wrong checksum of parameters. Happends typically after downloading new firmware or changing of the parameter. The controller stays in INIT mode. Check all parameters, write at least one new parameter.
Sd Gen Lx >V BOC Gen Lx <V (where x=1,2,3)
SD BOC
YES The generator voltage is out of limits given by Gen <V BOC and Gen >V Sd setpoints.
BOC Gen V Unbal BOC YES The generator voltage is unbalanced more than the value of Volt Unbal BOC setpoint.
BOC Gen >, <Freq BOC YES The generator frequency is out of limits given by Gen >Freq BOC and Gen <Freq BOC setpoints.
BOC Amps Unbal BOC NO The generator current is unbalanced.
BOC Amps IDMT BOC NO Generator current exceeds the limit for IDMT protection given by Nominal current and Amps IDMT Del setpoints.
BOC Overload BOC YES The load is greater than the value
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 96 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Events specification Protection
type
Information on binary output available (See list of Binary outputs)
Description
given by Overload setpoint.
Sd Earth Fault SD YES This alarm is activated when Eart Fault value exceeds Earth Fault Sd limit for at least Earth Fault Del period.
Sd Overspeed SD YES The protection comes active if the speed is greater than Overspeed setpoint.
Sd Underspeed SD YES During starting of the engine when the RPM reach the value of Starting RPM setpoint the starter is switched off and the speed of the engine can drop under Starting RPM again. Then the Underspeed protection becomes active. Protection evaluation starts 5 seconds after reaching StartingRPM.
EmergencyStop SD NO If the input Emergency Stop is opened shutdown is immediately activated.
GCB Fail SD NO Failure of generator circuit breaker.
Sd RPMMeasFail SD NO Failure of magnetic pick-up sensor for speed measurement. This alarm appears, if starter was disengaged for other reason than overcrossing starting speed (like oil pressure or D+) and at the end of timer Max Crank Time there are no RPMs > Starting speed detected.
Wrn Stop Fail WRN YES Gen-set stop failed. See descrition at Gen-set Operation States chapter.
WrnMaintenance WRN NO The period for servicing is set by the WrnMaintenance setpoint. The protection comes active if the running hours of the engine reach this value.
Wrn FuelThef WRN Fuel theft indication alarm.
ChargeAlt Fail WRN YES Failure of alternator for charging the battery.
Sd Override
WRN NO The protection is active if the output Sd Override is closed.
*Wrn RA15 Fail WRN NO Warning alarm in case of lost connection to IGL-RA15 module.
*Sd IOM Fail SD NO Shutdown alarm in case of lost connection to IG-IOM/IGS-PTM module.
Wrn ECU Alarm WRN NO ECU alarm list is not empty
Low BackupBatt WRN NO RTC backup battery is flat
Gen CCW Rot WRN NO Genset voltage phases are not wired correctly. MCB closing is prohibited by chontroller.
History file
InteliLite NT stores a record of each important event into the history file. The history file seats 100+ records. When the history file is full, the oldest records are removed. Number of history records varies with number of configured modules.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 97 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
For different ConnectionType [3Ph4Wire / 3Ph3Wire / Split Ph / Mono Ph] different voltages are shown in history file. In fact always Ph-Ph voltage is shown, but due to different connections the result is following:
1. For 3Ph4Wire: a. Vg1 = Gen. Ph-Ph voltage L1-L2 b. Vg2 = Gen. Ph-Ph voltage L2-L3 c. Vg3 = Gen. Ph-Ph voltage L3-L1
2. For 3Ph3Wire: a. Vg1 = Gen. Ph-Ph voltage L1-L2 b. Vg2 = Gen. Ph-Ph voltage L2-L3 c. Vg3 = Gen. Ph-Ph voltage L3-L1
3. For Split Ph: a. Vg1 = Gen. Ph-Ph voltage L1-L2 b. Vg2 = Gen. Ph-N voltage L2 c. Vg3 = Gen. Ph-N voltage L1
4. For Mono Ph: a. Vg1 = Gen. Ph-N voltage L1 b. Vg2 = 0 c. Vg3 = 0
The mains voltages are displayed in history analogously. Hint: To force history download in LiteEdit (direct, modem or Internet) open History window and select History | Read history command. Hint: The first history record after the controller is switched on, programmed or watchdog reset occurs contains diagnostic values instead of operational. Some fields in these records seem to have nonsense values. Do not take these values into account. Hint: Some of the controller models doesn´t have RTC. In this case there is no Date column and the Time column contains information about running hours.
Record structure
Abbreviation Historical value
Num Number of historical event
Reason Event specification
Date Date of historical event in format DD/MM/YY
Time Time of historical event in format HH:MM:SS
Mode Controller’s mode
RPM Engine speed
Pwr Generator active power
PF Generator PF
LChr Character of the load
Gfrq Generator frequency
Vg1 Generator voltage L1-L2 or *see description above
Vg2 Generator voltage L2-L3 or *see description above
Vg3 Generator voltage L3-L1 or *see description above
Ig1 Generator current L1
Ig2 Generator current L2
Ig3 Generator current L3
UBat Battery voltage
OilP IL-NT Analog input 1 value ( default Oil pressure)
EngT IL-NT Analog input 2 value ( default Water temperature)
FLvl IL-NT Analog input 3 value ( default Fuel Level)
BIN Binary inputs IL-NT
BOUT Binary outputs IL-NT
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 98 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
BIOE* Binary inputs/outputs plug-in module (when IL-NT-BIO8 module is configured)
FC* ECU alarm FailureCode (when ECU is configured)
FMI* ECUalarm Failure Mode Identifier (when ECU is configured)
AIM1* IG-IOM, IGS-PTM Analog input 1 value (when configured IG-IOM, IGS-PTM)
AIM2* IG-IOM, IGS-PTM Analog input 2 value (when configured IG-IOM, IGS-PTM)
AIM3* IG-IOM, IGS-PTM Analog input 3 value (when configured IG-IOM, IGS-PTM)
AIM4* IG-IOM, IGS-PTM Analog input 4 value (when configured IG-IOM, IGS-PTM)
BIM* IG-IOM, IGS-PTM Binary inputs (when configured IG-IOM, IGS-PTM)
BOM* IG-IOM, IGS-PTM Binary outputs (when configured IG-IOM, IGS-PTM)
EF Earth fault current
*Depends if enabled in configuration (see more details in LiteEdit-4.4-Reference Guide.pdf)
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 99 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Init Screens
Each InteliLite NT controller holds informations about serial number, uploaded firmware version and others. These informations are displayed on so called “Init Screens”. It is possible to call this screens
from any measurement screen by pressing ENTER and PAGE buttons concurrently and then only
PAGE button separately.
Inits screens consists of:
Customer Logo screen
This is a first screen which is dedicated for informations provided by customers such as contact numbers, service technician contact and customer message for end users of gen-set. Configuration of this screen is only done by LiteEdit PC software.
Firmware Init screen
This screen consists informations about type of controller, controller manufacturer ComAp, uploaded firmware branch, used application and version of firmware. There is also information about currently configured electronic engine, respectively used ESF file. Details on recognition of configured electronic engine are in chapter Identifying configured ECU.
Language screen
IL-NT controller offers configurable language support. On this screen si possible to switch between languages configured in controller. Other way to change language is by binary input Lang Selection.
User Interface screen
InteliLite NT controller since IL-NT 1.3 SW enables to choose the user interface as customer prefers. There are two choices available: USER or ENGINEER interface. USER interface is ment for customers, who prefer simple and easy menu and don’t wish to list in complex menu or change the settings of controller. In USER interface controller displayes measuring, alarm and init screens. ENGINEER interface is dedicated for engineers and allow changing the settings of controller, reviewing the history, measurement, alarms and grant the full access to all controllers screens with are available. This mode is default. This screen also consists information about controller’s Serial number and Password decode number which can be useful in case of lost password to controller. For this situations please contact your distributor for help and these two numbers will be needed to recover the password. Last value displeyed on screen is DiagData, which is internal ComAp information is case of FW or unit problems, which helps ComAp to analyze the root cause and find a proper solution. Please see latest IL-NT Operator Guide for detailed description.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 100 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Remote Control and Data Logging
Direct connection to the PC
InteliLite can be connected directly with PC via optional IL-NT RS232 interface. Use the recommended ComAp AT-LINK CABLE 1.8M or cross-wired serial communication cable with DB9 female connectors and signals Rx, Tx, GND for RS232 connection. Hint: Make sure the grounding system on controller and PC – COM port (negative of the PC DC supply) are identical – before the first direct connection. There must not be any voltage between these two points otherwise the internal reversible fuse in controller burns out. The simple solution is to assure, that the PC supply 240/20V is ground free (GND terminal is not connected).
RS232, USB or RS485 interface can be used for direct cable connection to a PC. The setpoint COM1 Mode or COM2 Mode (according to the interface used) must be set to DIRECT position for this kind of connection.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 101 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
DIRECT CABLE CONNECTION TYPES
Following modules are available for direct connection to a PC:
1. IL-NT-232
2. IL-NT-RS232-485
3. IL-NT-S-USB (USB easy removable service module)
The RS232 or USB interface uses COM1 port of the controller. The RS485 uses COM2.
PC software — LiteEdit
On the PC (for direct or modem connection) has to be installed the ComAp’s software package LiteEdit. (based on Windows 95 or newer platform) LiteEdit enables: read the quantities adjust all set points control the engine configure the controller select software configuration modify alarm inputs and outputs modify password, commands protections direct, modem or Internet communication
Modbus protocol
The selection of the function of IL serial port is done via the setpoint COMx Mode in Basic settings
57600 bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 102 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Transfer mode RTU
Function 3 (Read Multiply Registers)
Function 6 (Write Single Register)
Function 16 (Write Multiply Registers)
The response to an incoming message is sent with minimum 4.096 ms delay after message reception
The complete description of Modbus communication protocol can be found in Modbus Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 and Open Modbus Specification Release 1.0. Both documents are available from web site at http://www.modicon.com/openmbus/ . Communication object vs. Register All the data intended for communication has its representation as communication objects in the controller. The communication object is represented by the n-byte array in the controller memory and identified by the unique 16-bit communication object number. The register, according to Modbus communication protocol, represents a two-byte data and in communication functions is referenced by 16-bit register address. Further in the description of communication functions the communication object number will always be used as a register address and length of the communication object will be expressed by number of registers. Just one communication object can be read or written by one communication function. Hint: To obtain communication object numbers it is possible to download the actual controller description on-line from controller or from (ail) archive and use “export data” function from LiteEdit software. Communication object list (exported from default IL-NT-MRS16 archive) Setpoints of MRS16:
Name Firmware ver. Application Date App. ver. Ser. num. Filename
IL-NT IL-NT-2.0
R:18.05.2012 MRS16 7.6.2012 2,0 12345678 IL-NT-MRS16-2.0.AIL
Group Name Value Dimension
Com. obj. Low limit High limit Data type
Basic Settings Gen-set Name IL-NT 8637
Short string
Basic Settings Nominal Power 200 kW 8276 1 5000 Unsigned 16
Basic Settings Nomin Current 350 A 8275 1 10000 Unsigned 16
Basic Settings CT Ratio 2000 /5A 8274 1 5000 Unsigned 16
Basic Settings PT Ratio 1 /1 9579 0,1 500 Unsigned 16
Basic Settings NomVolts Ph-N 231 V 8277 80 20000 Unsigned 16
Basic Settings NomVolts Ph-Ph 400 V 11657 80 40000 Unsigned 16
Basic Settings Nominal Freq 50 Hz 8278 45 65 Unsigned 16
Basic Settings Gear Teeth 120 8252 0 500 Unsigned 16
Basic Settings Nominal RPM 1500 RPM 8253 100 4000 Unsigned 16
Basic Settings ControllerMode OFF 8315
String list
Basic Settings Reset To MAN DISABLED 9983
String list
Basic Settings Backlight Time 15 min 10121 0 241 Unsigned 8
Basic Settings ConnectionType 3Ph4Wire 11628
String list
Comms Settings ControllerAddr 1 24537 1 32 Unsigned 8
Comms Settings COM1 Mode DIRECT 24522
String list
Comms Settings COM2 Mode DIRECT 24451
String list
Comms Settings ModemIniString
24436
Long string
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 103 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Comms Settings ModbusComSpeed 9600 bps 24477
String list
Comms Settings IBLite IP Addr 192.168.1.254 24376
Short string
Comms Settings IBLite NetMask 255.255.255.0 24375
Short string
Comms Settings IBLite GateIP 192.168.1.1 24373
Short string
Comms Settings IBLite DHCP ENABLED 24259
String list
Comms Settings ComAp Port 23 24374 0 65535 Unsigned 16
Comms Settings APN Name
24363
Long string
Comms Settings APN User Name
24361
Long string
Comms Settings APN User Pass
24360
Short string
Comms Settings AirGate ENABLED 24365
String list
Comms Settings AirGate IP airgate.comap.cz 24364
Long string
Comms Settings SMTP User Name
24370
Long string
Comms Settings SMTP User Pass
24369
Short string
Comms Settings SMTP Server IP
24368
Long string
Comms Settings Contr MailBox
24367
Long string
Comms Settings Time Zone GMT+1:00 24366
String list
Comms Settings DNS IP Address 8.8.8.8 24362
Short string
Engine Params Starting RPM 25 % 8254 5 50 Unsigned 8
Engine Params Starting Oil P 4,5 Bar 9681 0 10 Integer 16
Engine Params Prestart Time 2 s 8394 0 600 Unsigned 16
Engine Params MaxCrank Time 5 s 8256 1 255 Unsigned 8
Engine Params CrnkFail Pause 8 s 8257 5 60 Unsigned 8
Engine Params Crank Attempts 3 8255 1 10 Unsigned 8
Engine Params Idle Time 12 s 9097 0 600 Unsigned 16
Engine Params Min Stab Time 2 s 8259 1 10 Unsigned 16
Engine Params Max Stab Time 10 s 8313 2 300 Unsigned 16
Engine Params Cooling Speed NOMINAL 10046
String list
Engine Params Cooling Time 30 s 8258 0 3600 Unsigned 16
Engine Params Stop Time 60 s 9815 0 600 Unsigned 16
Engine Params Fuel Solenoid DIESEL 9100
String list
Engine Params D+ Function DISABLED 9683
String list
Engine Params Fuel Pump ON 20 % 10100 -100 90 Integer 16
Engine Params Fuel Pump OFF 90 % 10101 20 10000 Integer 16
Engine Params TempSwitch ON 90 — 8688 -100 10000 Integer 16
Engine Params TempSwitch OFF 75 — 8689 -100 10000 Integer 16
Engine Params PowerSwitch ON 100 kW 11658 0 32000 Integer 16
Engine Params PowerSwitchOFF 50 kW 11659 0 32000 Integer 16
Engine Params FuelTankVolume 200 L 11103 0 10000 Unsigned 16
Engine Params MaxFuelDrop 25 %/h 12373 0 50 Unsigned 8
Engine Protect ProtectHoldOff 5 s 8262 0 300 Unsigned 16
Engine Protect Horn Timeout 10 s 8264 0 600 Unsigned 16
Engine Protect Overspeed Sd 115 % 8263 50 150 Unsigned 16
Engine Protect AI1 Wrn 2 Bar 8369 -10 1000 Integer 16
Engine Protect AI1 Sd 1 Bar 8370 -10 1000 Integer 16
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 104 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Engine Protect AI1 Del 3 s 8365 0 900 Unsigned 16
Engine Protect AI2 Wrn 80 °C 8375 -100 10000 Integer 16
Engine Protect AI2 Sd 90 °C 8376 -100 10000 Integer 16
Engine Protect AI2 Del 5 s 8371 0 900 Unsigned 16
Engine Protect AI3 Wrn 20 % 8381 -100 10000 Integer 16
Engine Protect AI3 Sd 10 % 8382 -100 10000 Integer 16
Engine Protect AI3 Del 10 s 8377 0 900 Unsigned 16
Engine Protect Batt Overvolt 36 V 9587 18 40 Integer 16
Engine Protect Batt Undervolt 18 V 8387 8 40 Integer 16
Engine Protect Batt Volt Del 5 s 8383 0 600 Unsigned 16
Engine Protect WrnMaintenance 9999 h 9648 0 10000 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Overload BOC 120 % 8280 0 200 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Overload Del 5 s 8281 0 600 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Short Crct BOC 250 % 8282 100 500 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Short Crct Del 0,04 s 9991 0 10 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Amps IDMT Del 4 s 8283 1 60 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Amps Unbal BOC 50 % 8284 1 200 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Amps Unbal Del 5 s 8285 0 600 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Gen >V Sd 110 % 8291 70 200 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Gen <V BOC 70 % 8293 0 110 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Gen V Del 3 s 8292 0 600 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Volt Unbal BOC 10 % 8288 1 200 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Volt Unbal Del 3 s 8289 0 600 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Gen >Freq BOC 110 % 8296 85 200 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Gen <Freq BOC 85 % 8298 0 110 Unsigned 16
Gener Protect Gen Freq Del 3 s 8297 0 600 Unsigned 16
Date/Time Time Stamp Per 60 min 8979 0 240 Unsigned 8
Date/Time SummerTimeMod DISABLED 8727
String list
Date/Time Time 0:00:00 24554
Time
Date/Time Date 1.1.2006 24553
Date
Date/Time Timer1Function No Func 11660
String list
Date/Time Timer1 Repeat NONE 10045
String list
Date/Time Timer1 ON Time 5:00:00 10042
Time
Date/Time Timer1Duration 5 min 10044 1 1440 Unsigned 16
Date/Time Timer2Function No Func 11661
String list
Date/Time Timer2 Repeat NONE 10202
String list
Date/Time Timer2 ON Time 5:00:00 10199
Time
Date/Time Timer2Duration 5 min 10201 1 1440 Unsigned 16
Sensors Spec AI1Calibration 0 Bar 8431 -100 100 Integer 16
Sensors Spec AI2Calibration 0 °C 8407 -1000 1000 Integer 16
Sensors Spec AI3Calibration 0 % 8467 -1000 1000 Integer 16
SMS/E-Mail Yel Alarm Msg OFF 8482
String list
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 105 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
SMS/E-Mail Red Alarm Msg OFF 8484
String list
SMS/E-Mail Event Msg OFF 10926
String list
SMS/E-Mail TelNo/Addr Ch1
9597
Long string
SMS/E-Mail TelNo/Addr Ch2
9598
Long string
SMS/E-Mail SMS Language 1 11394 1 2 Unsigned 8
Alternate Cfg Nominal RPM 1 1500 RPM 9915 100 4000 Unsigned 16
Alternate Cfg Nominal Freq 1 50 Hz 9913 45 65 Unsigned 16
Alternate Cfg NomVoltsPh-N 1 230 V 12052 80 20000 Unsigned 16
Alternate Cfg NomVoltsPh-Ph1 400 V 12055 80 40000 Unsigned 16
Alternate Cfg Nomin Current1 350 A 12049 1 10000 Unsigned 16
Alternate Cfg Connect Type 1 3Ph4Wire 12058
String list
Alternate Cfg Nominal RPM 2 1800 RPM 9916 100 4000 Unsigned 16
Alternate Cfg Nominal Freq 2 60 Hz 9914 45 65 Unsigned 16
Alternate Cfg NomVoltsPh-N 2 120 V 12053 80 20000 Unsigned 16
Alternate Cfg NomVoltsPh-Ph2 208 V 12056 80 40000 Unsigned 16
Alternate Cfg Nomin Current2 350 A 12050 1 10000 Unsigned 16
Alternate Cfg Connect Type 2 3Ph4Wire 12059
String list
Values of MRS16:
Name Firmware ver. Application Date App. ver. Ser. num. Filename
IL-NT IL-NT-2.0
R:18.05.2012 MRS16 7.6.2012 2,0 12345678 IL-NT-MRS16-
2.0.AIL
Group Name Value Dimension Com. obj. Data type
Engine RPM 0 RPM 8209 Unsigned 16
Generator Gen kW 0 kW 8202 Integer 16 Generator Gen kW L1 0 kW 8524 Integer 16 Generator Gen kW L2 0 kW 8525 Integer 16 Generator Gen kW L3 0 kW 8526 Integer 16 Generator Gen kVAr 0 kVAr 8203 Integer 16 Generator Gen kVAr L1 0 kVAr 8527 Integer 16 Generator Gen kVAr L2 0 kVAr 8528 Integer 16 Generator Gen kVAr L3 0 kVAr 8529 Integer 16 Generator Gen kVA 0 kVA 8565 Integer 16 Generator Gen kVA L1 0 kVA 8530 Integer 16 Generator Gen kVA L2 0 kVA 8531 Integer 16 Generator Gen kVA L3 0 kVA 8532 Integer 16 Generator Gen PF 0 8204 Integer 8 Generator Gen Char 8395 Char Generator Gen PF L1 0 8533 Integer 8 Generator Gen Char L1 8626 Char Generator Gen PF L2 0 8534 Integer 8 Generator Gen Char L2 8627 Char Generator Gen PF L3 0 8535 Integer 8 Generator Gen Char L3 8628 Char Generator Gen Freq 0 Hz 8210 Unsigned 16 Generator Gen V L1-N 0 V 8192 Unsigned 16 Generator Gen V L2-N 0 V 8193 Unsigned 16 Generator Gen V L3-N 0 V 8194 Unsigned 16 Generator Gen V L1-L2 0 V 9628 Unsigned 16 Generator Gen V L2-L3 0 V 9629 Unsigned 16 Generator Gen V L3-L1 0 V 9630 Unsigned 16
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 106 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Generator Gen A L1 0 A 8198 Unsigned 16 Generator Gen A L2 0 A 8199 Unsigned 16 Generator Gen A L3 0 A 8200 Unsigned 16
Controller I/O Battery Volts 0 V 8213 Integer 16 Controller I/O D+ 0 V 10603 Integer 16 Controller I/O Oil Pressure 0 Bar 8227 Integer 16 Controller I/O Engine Temp 0 °C 8228 Integer 16 Controller I/O Fuel Level 0 % 8229 Integer 16 Controller I/O Bin Inputs [000000] 8235 Binary 16 Controller I/O Bin Outputs [000000] 8239 Binary 16 Controller I/O GSM SignalLvl 0 % 11895 Unsigned 16 Controller I/O GSM ErrorRate 0 12199 Unsigned 8 Controller I/O GSM Diag Code: 0 11270 Unsigned 8 Controller I/O AirGate Diag: 0 11271 Unsigned 8
Controller I/O AirGate ID: No Connection 12385 Long string
Controller I/O Modem Status:
No Connection 12485 Short string
Statistics Genset kWh 0 8205 Integer 32 Statistics Genset kVArh 0 8539 Integer 32 Statistics Run Hours 0 h 8206 Integer 32 Statistics Num Starts 0 8207 Unsigned 16 Statistics Maintenance 9999 h 9648 Unsigned 16 Statistics Num E-Stops 0 11195 Unsigned 32 Statistics Shutdowns 0 11196 Unsigned 32 Statistics TotFuelConsum 0 L 9040 Unsigned 32
IL Info Engine State ##### 8330 Unsigned 16 IL Info Breaker State ##### 8455 Unsigned 16 IL Info Timer Text ##### 8954 Unsigned 16 IL Info Timer Value 0 s 8955 Unsigned 16 IL Info FW Version 2 8393 Unsigned 8 IL Info Application 4 8480 Unsigned 8 IL Info FW Branch 1 8707 Unsigned 8 IL Info PasswordDecode ##### 9090 Unsigned 32 IL Info DiagData ##### 10050 Unsigned 32
Date/Time Time ##### 24554 Time Date/Time Date ##### 24553 Date
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 107 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Remote Communication
Hint: Refer to InteliCommunication guide for all additional information.
Internet connection
IL-NT controllers can be monitored from LiteEdit over the Internet using Internet Bridge (IG-IB) connected to the controller RS232 port. Or via plug-in card IB-Lite directly plugged in communication slot on back side of the controller.
SNMP connection
For SNMP protocol support it is possible to use converter Modbus RTU — SNMP with ComAp order code “GNOME SNMP CONVERTER IL-NT”.
For connection of 1-32 IL-NT controllers to a SNMP supervision system
Supports GET, SET, TRAP transactions
For more details see IL-NT, IA-NT, IC-NT Communication Guide available here:
http://www.comap.cz/products/detail/intelilite-nt-amf-25/downloads/#tabs
Recommended ISDN modem
Askey TAS-200E
ASUScom TA-220ST
Develo Microlink ISDN i
Recommended GSM modem
Siemens M20, TC35, TC35i, ES75, MC39 (Cinterion MC55i is NOT recommended)
Wavecom M1200/WMOD2
Wavecom — Maestro 20, dual 900/1800MHz.
Wavecom – Fastrack M1306B, dual 900/1800 MHz (Fastrack M1206B is NOT recommended)
FALCOM A2D, dual 900/1800MHz.
GSM Modem setup
Prior to start work with GSM modem run following program for GSM proper setup. Program writes all the necessary AT commands to configure the GSM modem properly for use with IL-NT. This program runs independent on LiteEdit:
Start MS Windows-Start-Program files — LiteEdit –Gm_setup.exe.
Select COM port
Select iG-CU (=IS-CU) or iG-MU unit
Press Setup button
Follow commands in GSM Modem Setup window Typical real baud rate for GSM data communication is 80 to 90 Bps. Hint: It is strongly recommended to use the same type of modem on the both sides (IL and PC) of connection.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 108 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Mobile SIM card setting
Adjust SIM card in GSM modem following way:
enable data connection (when required)
no PIN code
Short guide how to start using IL-NT-GPRS module
CAUTION! Any manipulation with plug-in module shall be done with disconnected power supply to both controller and module. Power supply shall be switched on also is same time to both module and controller. Fail to follow these instructions (power supply active only in controller or only in module) can lead to module or controller failure!
1. You will need one of supported ComAp controllers (IL-NT/IC-NT/ID-Lite), IL-NT-GPRS, antenna, SIM card with GPRS service and optionally IL-NT-RS232 or IL-NT-S-USB module. Firmware supporting IL-NT-GPRS module is IL-NT-WSUP 1.0 or selected customer branches (contact [email protected] for details). It is available here: http://www.comap.cz/products/detail/IL-NT-GPRS/support/software/
2. Contact SIM card operator for getting GPRS APN (APN = Access Point Name) name, username and password. Some operator’s APNs are listed here: http://www.quickim.com/support/gprs-settings.html#Australia or here: http://www.flexispy.com/Mobile%20APN%20Setting%20to%20use%20GPRS.htm Example: APN Name = internet.t-mobile.cz, UserName = [blank], Password = [blank].
3. Make sure SIM card does not require PIN code. If it does, it is possible to disable it in any common network unlocked mobile telephone.
4. Power up the ComAp controller. 5. Enter correct APN Name, APN UserName and APN UserPass in controller’s setpoint group
Comms Settings. Set COM1 Mode = DIRECT. Comms settings as every sepoint group are
Analog modem
Analog modem
GSM modem
GSM modem or
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 109 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
accessible by PAGE button from any measurement screen on controller. Setpoints can be set on controller’s front panel keyboard or by LiteEdit 4.5 and higher.
6. Switch off ComAp controller. 7. Place the SIM card into slot on IL-NT-GPRS card, plug in the IL-NT-GPRS card into
communication slot on back side of ComAp controller. 8. Connect the antenna to designated SMA connector. 9. Connect power supply to IL-NT-GPRS module. It supports 8-36V DC voltage. 10. Power up the system. 11. Wait for approx 2 — 4 minutes for first connection of the system to AirGate. AirGate will
generate automatically the AirGate ID value. Then navigate to last of measurement screens where you will find signal strength bar and AirGate ID identifier.
Once this AirGate ID is displayed, connection via AirGate was succesfull. This value will be needed for LiteEdit or WebSupervisor connection. Kindly make a note for future reference. AirGate Connection dialog in LiteEdit:
Add new gen-set dialog in WebSupervisor:
Should you encounter any troubles with connection, check the faultcodes on the same screen and find detailed description in Diagnostic codes listed lower.
12. Open LiteEdit PC software or enter your WebSupervisor account at http://websupervisor.comap.cz.
Hint: For opening a new WebSupervisor account kindly send e-mail to [email protected] your Name, Login name, E-mail address and Timezone. We will create free account for you. Details at: http://www.comap.cz/products/detail/WebSupervisor .
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 110 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Communication is now ready for use. Hint: To reduce the data traffic over GPRS network you can set in setpoint group „Comms Settings“ the parameter „AirGate IP“ = 80.95.108.26. This will save significant data amount needed for translation of Airgate server IP address. In case of changing the server IP address this settings has to be updated or returned to default „airgate.comap.cz“. Hint: From it’s nature the GPRS connection can from time to time drop for a short time due to a number of reasons affecting the cellular network. However the system is designed in the way that controller will automaticaly reconnect back.
GSM Diag Code – Diagnostic code for IL-NT-GPRS modem
Table of Diagnostic Codes:
Code Description
0 OK. No error.
1 Not possible to hang up.
2 IL-NT-GPRS is switched off
3 IL-NT-GPRS is switched on
4 IL-NT-GPRS – error in initialization
5 IL-NT-GPRS – not possible to set the APN
6 IL-NT-GPRS – not possible to connect to GPRS network
7 IL-NT-GPRS – not possible to retrieve IP address
8 IL-NT-GPRS – not accepted DNS IP address
9 Error in modem detection
10 Error in initialization of analog modem
11 SIM card is locked (Possibly PIN code required, PIN needs to be deactivated) or unknown
status of SIM locking
12 No GSM signal
13 Not possible to read the SIM card parameters
14 GSM modem did not accepted particular initialization command, possibly caused by
locked SIM card
15 Unknown modem
16 Bad answer to complement initialization string
17 Not possible to read GSM signal strength
18 CDMA modem not detected
19 No CDMA network
20 Unsuccesful registration to CDMA network
255 Only running communication is needed to indicate
AirGate Diag – Diagnostic Code for AirGate connection Table of Diagnostic Codes:
Code Description
0 Waiting for connection to AirGate Server
1 Controller registered, waiting for authorization
2 Not possible to register, controller blacklisted
3 Not possible to register, server has no more capacity
4 Not possible to register, other reason
5 Controller registered and authorized
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 111 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
IL-NT-RD Remote display software
This chapter describes Remote display software IL-NT-RD, which is designed as an remote signalling and control software for InteliLite-NT and InteliDrive Lite controllers. It is the optional software which is possible to upload into controller instead of standard controller’s firmware.
General description
Remote display software works as “remote display and control” for the master InteliLite-NT or InteliDrive Lite controller. Genset/Engines can be controlled from remote display as well as from master controller. All remote display screens (Measure, Setpoints and History) displays the same data like master controller. Front panel buttons on both controllers work the same way. All remote display LED’s shows the same state as corresponding LED’s on master controller.
Warning !
It is highly recommended to use the same type and model of controller for master and remote display. Only in such case is assured the proper function of all buttons, LED diods and display. Another combinations of HW types and models from Master controller and remote display are not supported nor tested!
IL-NT-RD Software installation
The IL-NT-RD remote display firmware is installed in the same way as any other IL-NT firmware using LiteEdit software. Please see LiteEdit Reference guide for details about upgrading firmware. IL-NT-RD consists only firmware, not an archive. However when there is IL-NT-RD firmware installed in the controller the procedure to install back the original standard firmware is following:
Open any type of online connection.
DDE server will try to open the connection, but it will fail and write red error message in the status bar.
In this moment go to CONTROLLER -> PROGRAMMING AND CLONING -> PROGRAMMING and select proper! firmware you want program to the controller. Choosing the wrong type of firmware
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 112 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
may result in non-functional controller.
Press «OK» button to programm the firmware to the controller.
It may be required to switch off power supply of controller, close the boot jumper and switch on controller again. Follow the information windows accordingly.
After programming is finished (it may be required to power off controller, open the boot jumper and power it on again) open configuration window and perform the configuration process manually. There is no compatibility of the configuration between different firmware versions.
In some cases the «wrong setpoints» message can occur in the DDE server status line and the controller is blocked showing «Init» state. Use CONTROLLER -> RESET FROM INIT STATE menu item to put the controller to normal operation. Be sure you have checked all setpoints before.
CAUTION! Check the statistic value «Engine hours» after firmware upgrade. Change of statistical values if necessary is possible only by LiteEdit software (password is required).
IL-NT-RD Wiring
IL-NT-RD can be connected to InteliLite-NT or InteliDrive Lite controller via RS232 or RS485 communication line. It is possible to connect only up to two remote displays to one master controller, if they are using different communication COMs. It is not supported to connect two or more remote displays to one communication line, eg. RS485. It is possible to monitor only one master controller from one remote display at the time.
Connection process
Remote display after power on automaticaly starts to search for any master controller connected. It starts to search on COM1 from master controllers address 1 to 32 and later on COM2 from address 1 to 32. Remote display tries two communication speeds 38400 bps and 56000bps. During this process is displayed text “Detecting…” on screen and progress bar below counts from 0 to 100%. This process takes approx. 10-15 seconds. Than is 5 seconds pause and process continues again until compatible master controller is found. Not supported types of controllers, not supported application, or controllers that are not properly comunicating are skipped during the search.
Controller type selection
IL-NT-RD automatically detects controller type.
Troubles with connection There are few reasons why remote display can not connect with master controller:
1. Not supported type of controller connected (Eg. IGS-NT, ID-DCU, IC-NT, IGS-CU, etc.)
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 113 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
2. Not supported firmware in master controller 3. Configuration table error in master controller 4. Wrong settings of setpoint COMx Mode in master controller 5. Wrong connection, wiring, communication fail
Direct RS232 connection
HW module: IL-NT-RS232 Master controller settings: ControllerAddr = 1..32 COM1 Mode = DIRECT Up to 2 meters: It is recommended to use our standard AT-LINK cable.
IL-NT
ID-Lite
IL-NT-
RS232
IL-NT-
RS232
IL-NT
ID-Lite
Remote Display Master controller
RS 232 (COM1)
Up to 10 meters: It is recommended to use standard Null-modem cable for local connection between controller and remote display, although the three wires (TxD, RxD, GND) RS 232 connection is enough for direct communication:
IL-NT/ID-Lite connector D-SUB9 female
IL-NT-RD connector D-SUB9 female
RxD 2 3 TxD TxD 3 2 RxD GND 5 5 GND
Remote RS485 and/or direct RS232 connection
HW module: IL-NT-RS232-485 Up to 1000 meters (only with RS485):
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 114 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
IL-NT
ID-Lite
IL-NT-
RS232-485
IL-NT-
RS232-485
IL-NT
ID-Lite
Remote Display Master controller
RS 232 (COM1)
OR
IL-NT
ID-Lite
IL-NT-
RS232-485
IL-NT-
RS232-485
IL-NT
ID-Lite
Remote Display Master controller
RS 485 (COM2)
OR
IL-NT
ID-Lite
IL-NT-
RS232-485
IL-NT-
RS232-485
IL-NT
ID-Lite
Remote Display 1 Master controller
RS 485 (COM2)
IL-NT
ID-Lite
IL-NT-
RS232-485
Remote Display 2
RS 232 (COM1)
Case 1) RS232 Master controller settings: ControllerAddr = 1..32 COM1 Mode = DIRECT Case 2) RS485 Master controller settings: ControllerAddr = 1..32 COM2 Mode = DIRECT Case 3) RS232 +RS485 Master controller settings: ControllerAddr = 1..32 COM1 Mode = DIRECT COM2 Mode = DIRECT It is possible to make a RS232 direct connection with IL-NT-RS232 module on one side and IL-NT-RS232-485 module on the other side.
Alternative connection using external RS232-RS422/485 converter:
Recommend external converter:
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 115 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
ADVANTECH – ADAM 4520: RS232 to RS422/485 converter, DIN rail, automatic RS485 bus supervision, no external data flow control signals, galvanic isolated, baud rate 38400 or 56000 bps. Any connected RS 232 to RS 422/485 converter has to be set to passive DSR signal (when DSR connected) after switch on.
Function description
Remote display IL-NT-RD works as remote display and control of the master InteliLite-NT or InteliDrive Lite controller. It is supposed and highly recommended that both, remote display and master are using the same HW type and model of controller. Another types and models of master and remote display are not supported nor tested. All remote display’s LEDs shows the same state as corresponding LEDs on master controller. Front panel buttons on both controllers work in the same way. Genset/Engine can be controlled from remote display as well as from master controller. User can switch screens, set password, change setpoints and view history records. All IL-NT-RD screens Init, Measure, Setpoints and History display the same data like in the master controller. Master device is always able to work without connected Remote display. Interruption of the serial line between master device and Remote display has no effect to the master controller. If the serial line between master device and remote display is interrupted, or communication cannot be established, remote display shows it’s Init screen and message “Trying” and all LED’s are off. Once remote display finds compatible master it shows “Preparing” and downloads configuration table from master controller. After the configuration from master is downloaded remote display jump to master controllers Init screen and all LEDs and blinking. It is possible to switch to remote displays Init screen to check it’s version and serial number of used controller and communication status by pressing PAGE button for 3 seconds.
SW compatibility
IL-NT-RD sw. version 1.1 is compatible with masters SW:
All InteliLite-NT standard software from ver. 1.1
All ID-Lite standard software from ver. 1.0
Chosen IL-NT and ID-Lite customer branches Some of the future IL-NT, ID-Lite versions may require upgrade of the IL-NT-RD software.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 116 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Maintenance
Backup battery replacement
The internal backup battery should be replaced approx. every 5-7 years. Replace the battery, if the alarm Low BackupBatt occurs. Follow these instructions:
1. Disconnect all terminals from the controller and remove the controller from the switchboard. 2. Release the rear cover using a flat screwdriver or another suitable tool.
3. Remove all plug-in modules. 4. The battery is located in a holder on the circuit board. Remove the old battery with a small
sharp screwdriver and push with a finger the new battery into the holder. Use only CR1225 lithium battery.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 117 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
5. Put the rear cover back. Use slight pressure to lock the snaps into the housing. Pay attention that the cover is in correct position and not upside down!
6. Plug the modules back into the slots. 7. Power the controller on, adjust date and time and check all setpoints.
Hint: When internal RTC battery becomes flat, controller function (e.g. Ready for stand by) does not change until controller power supply is switched off. Some time before the battery is completely exhausted, a warning message appears in Alarmlist: «RTCbatteryFlat». After the next power switch on (with flat battery already) controller:
Genset is still possible to run
All new history records will have not valid date and time stamp.
Time and Date values are set not valid value
Statistics values are random
Timers (Timer1..2 Function) will not be executed
Fuel theft protection may not work
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 118 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Technical Data
Inputs/Outputs overview
Model BIN BOUT AI AOUT COM1 COM2 CAN RPM Gen. Voltage
Mains Voltage
Gen. Current
IL-NT MRS10 6+8*+8** 6+8*+8** 3 8* Y* Y* N Y Y N Y
IL-NT MRS11 6+8*+8** 6+8*+8** 3 8* Y* Y* N Y Y N Y
IL-NT MRS15 6+8*+8** 6+8*+8** 3+4* 8* Y* Y* Y Y Y N Y
IL-NT MRS16 6+8*+8** 6+8*+8** 3+4* 8* Y* Y* Y Y Y N Y
Note: * With optional extension module IGS-PTM or IG-IOM ** With optional plug-in module
Y -Available
N -Not available
Generator protections
ComAp gen-set controllers provide following range of generator protections. For each protection adjustable limit and time delay are available. Comparison table with ANSI codes:
ANSI code Protection
IL-NT MRS10
IL-NT MRS11
IL-NT MRS15
IL-NT MRS16
59 Overvoltage • • • •
27 Undervoltage • • • •
47 Voltage Assymetry • • • •
81H Overfrequency • • • •
81L Underfrequency • • • •
50+51 Overcurrent *** *** • •
46 Current Unbalance • • • •
32 Overload • • • •
51N+64 Earth Fault — — • •
32R Reverse Power — — — —
25 Synchronism Check — — — —
47 Phase Rotation ** ** ** **
37 Undercurrent — — — —
55 Power Factor — — — —
71 Gas (Fuel) Level • • • •
Note:
— Not available
• Available
** Fixed setting
*** Shortcurrent only
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 119 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Language support
IL-NT in firmware version 1.5 supports following language code pages:
Code page Language Windows code
0 West European languages Windows 1252
134 Chinese GB 2312
162 Turkish Windows 1254
177 Hebrew Windows 1255
204 Russian Windows 1251
238 East European languages Windows 1250
Power supply
Voltage supply 8-36V DC Consumption 40-430mA depend on supply voltage and temperature Consumption depends on supply voltage 0,104A at 8VDC 0,080A at 12VDC 0,051A at 24VDC 0,044A at 30VDC
0,040A at 36VDC Allowed supply voltage drop-out: 100ms from min. 10V, return to min. 8V Battery voltage measurement tolerance 2 % at 24V Hint: For the supply voltage less than 7V the backlight of the display is switched off. Short-term voltage drops (e.g. during the engine cranking) do not affect the operation at all.
Operating conditions
Operating temperature IL-NT -20..+70
oC
Operating temperature IL-NT LT# -40..+70
oC
Storage temperature -30..+80oC
Protection front panel IP65 Humidity 95% without condensation Standard conformity Low Voltage Directive EN 61010-1:95 +A1:97 Electromagnetic Compatibility EN 50081-1:94, EN 50081-2:96 EN 50082-1:99, EN 50082-2:97 Vibration 5 — 25 Hz, ±1,6mm
25 — 100 Hz, a = 4 g Shocks a = 200 m/s
2
#Low Temperature modification
LCD display limits controller operating temperature range to –20
oC — + 70
oC even if the other
electronic components work in wider temperature range. Internal preheating foil is mounted in InteliLite
NT LT to extend display operational temperature range.
Preheating starts at temperature below 5 oC and preheating power depends on temperature and
power supply voltage.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 120 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Technical data
IL-NT Standard Order code:IL-NT-xxxxx LT
Operating temperature -20 oC..+70
oC -40
oC..+70
oC
Storage temperature -30 oC..+80
oC -30
oC..+80
oC
Preheating foil increases controller current consumption
Controller consumption at
No preheating Preheating at ambient temperature
0 oC -20
oC -40
oC
12VDC 80 mA +75 mA +210 mA +325 mA
24VDC 51 mA +31 mA +100 mA +175 mA
InteliLite LT works immediately after switch on at -30 o
C and display becomes visible after a few minutes.
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions 180x120x55mm Weight 450g
Generator
Nominal frequency 50-60Hz Frequency measurement tolerance 0,2Hz
Current inputs
Nominal input current (from CT) 5 A
Load (CT output impedance) < 0,1 CT input burden < 0,2 VA per phase (In=5A) Max. measured current from CT 10 A Current measurement tolerance 2% from the Nominal current Max. peak current from CT 150 A / 1s Max. continuous current 12 A
Voltage inputs Measuring voltage range 0 – 277 VAC phase to neutral 0 – 480 VAC phase to phase Maximal measured voltage 340 VAC phase to neutral 600 VAC phase to phase
Input resistance 0.6 M phase to phase
0.3 M phase to neutral Voltage measurement tolerance 2 % from the Nominal voltage Overvoltage class III / 2 (EN61010)
Binary inputs and outputs
Binary inputs Number of inputs 6
Input resistance 4,2 k Input range 0-36 VDC Voltage level for close contact indication (Logical 1) <0,8 VDC Voltage level for open contact indication (Logical 0) >2 VDC Max voltage level for open contact indication 8-36 VDC
Binary open collector outputs Number of outputs 6 Maximum current 0,5 A
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 121 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Maximum switching voltage 36 VDC
Analog inputs
Not electrically separated Number of inputs 3 Resolution 10 bits
Maximal resistance range 2500
Resistance measurement tolerance 2 % 2 out of measured value
Speed pick-up input
Type of sensor magnetic pick-up (connection by shielded
cable is recommended) Minimum input voltage 2 Vpk-pk (from 4 Hz to 4 kHz) Maximum input voltage 50 Veff Minimum measured frequency 4 Hz Maximum measured frequency 10 kHz (min. input voltage 6Vpk-pk) Frequency measurement tolerance 0,2 %
D+ Terminal
CHARGE ALT D+ Function: Max. CHARGE ALT D+ output current 300 mA Guaranteed level for signal Charging OK 80% of supply voltage
*CAN bus interface
Galvanically separated Maximal CAN bus length 200m Speed 250kBd
Nominal impedance 120 Cable type twisted pair (shielded) Following dynamic cable parameters are important especially for maximal 200 meters CAN bus length and 32 iS-COM units connected: Nominal Velocity of Propagation min. 75% (max. 4,4 ns/m) Wire crosscut min.0,25 mm
2
Maximal attenuation (at 1 MHz) 2 dB / 100m Recommended Industrial Automation & Process Control Cables: BELDEN (see http://www.belden.com):
3082A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3083A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3086A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
3087A DeviceBus for Honeywell SDS
3084A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3085A DeviceBus for Allen-Bradley DeviceNet
3105A Paired EIA Industrial RS485 cable LAPP CABLE
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Trunk Cable
Unitronic BUS DeviceNet Drop Cable
Unitronic BUS CAN
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 122 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Unitronic-FD BUS P CAN UL/CSA
IL-NT RS232 interface (optional card)
Plugs into IL-NT controller COMMUNICATION MODULE port. Maximal distance 10m Maximum Speed Up to 57.6 kBd (DIRECT), 38.4kBd Analog modem, 9.6 kBd digital modem, 57.6 kBd (MODBUS) Recommend external converter: ADVANTECH – ADAM 4520: RS232 to RS422/485 converter, DIN rail, automatic RS485 bus supervision, no external data flow control signals, galvanic isolated. Recommended internal converter: ADVANTECH – PCL-745B or PCL745S : Dual port RS422/485 Interface card, automatic RS485 bus supervision, no external data flow control signals, galvanic isolated Hint: For details on all IL-NT extension and communication modules see IL-NT, IC-NT-Accessory Modules manual. With SW version IL-NT 1.2 and older, the communication speeds are 19.2kBd (STD/DIRECT), 19.2kBd Analog modem, 9.6 kBd digital modem, 9.6kBd (MODBUS)
IL-NT RS232-485 interface (optional card)
Plugs into IL-NT controller COMMUNICATION MODULE port. Maximal distance 10m (RS232), 1200m (RS485) Maximum Speed Up to 57.6 kBd (DIRECT), 38.4kBd Analog modem, 9.6 kBd digital modem, 57.6 kBd (MODBUS) Hint: This module is supported with SW version IL-NT 1.3 and newer.
IL-NT S-USB interface (optional card)
Plugs into IL-NT controller COMMUNICATION MODULE port. Maximal distance 5m Maximum Speed Up to 57.6 kBd (DIRECT), 38.4kBd Analog modem, 9.6 kBd digital modem, 57.6 kBd (MODBUS) Use only shielded A-B USB cables up to 5m length. Recommend USB cable: USB-LINK CABLE 1.8M – ComAp A-B USB cable. Hint: With SW version IL-NT 1.2 and older, the communication speeds are 19.2kBd (STD/DIRECT), 19.2kBd Analog modem, 9.6 kBd digital modem, 9.6kBd (MODBUS)
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 123 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
IL-NT AOUT8 interface (optional card)
Plugs into IL-NT controller EXTENSION MODULE port. Number of PWM outputs 8 PWM frequency 250Hz Maximum current 0.5 A Maximum switching voltage 36 VDC Output resistance 1Ω Resolution 10 bits
IL-NT-EFCPM interface (optional card)
Dimension (WxHxD) 66x37x10 mm (2,6’x1,45’x0,4’) Weight 124g Interface to controller Direct mounted Earth fault current protection input Not galvanic separated
Input range up to 8,32 mA Binary Input Not galvanic separated
Input resistance – 4,2kohm Input range – 0 VDC to 36 VDC
Binary outputs (open collector) Not galvanic separated Maximum current – 1,0 ADC Maximum switching voltage – 36 VDC Voltage drop 1 VDC
Storage temperature — 40°C to + 80°C Operating temperature — 40°C to + 70°C
IC-NT CT-BIO7 interface (optional card)
7 dedicated pins of the plug-in card’s terminal can be configured as binary inputs or outputs. CURRENT MEASURING INPUT Number of inputs 1
Nominal input current (from CT) 5A Load (CT output impedance) < 0.1 Max measured current from CT 10A Current measurement tolerance 2% from Nominal current Max peak current from CT 150A / 1s Max continuous current 10A (All values in RMS)
BINARY INPUTS Number of inputs 7 Input resistance 4.7k Input range 0-36 VDC Voltage level for close contact indication (Logical 1) <0.8 VDC Voltage level for open contact indication (Logical 0) >2 VDC Max voltage level for open contact indication 8-36 VDC
BINARY OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUTS
Number of outputs 7 Maximum current per pin 0.5 A Maximum switching common current 2A Maximum switching voltage 36 VDC
Hint: Binary inputs are not galvanically isolated.
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 124 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
IL-NT BIO8 interface (optional card)
Plugs into IL-NT controller EXTENSION MODULE port. 8 dedicated pins of the plug-in card’s terminal can be configured as binary inputs or outputs.
Binary inputs Number of inputs 8 Input resistance 4,7kΩ Input range 0-36 VDC Voltage level for close contact indication (Logical 1) <0,8 VDC Voltage level for open contact indication (Logical 0) >2 VDC Max voltage level for open contact indication 8-36 VDC
Binary open collector outputs
Number of outputs 8 Maximum current per pin 0,5 A Maximum switching common current 2 A Maximum switching voltage 36V Hint: Binary inputs are not galvanicaly isolated. Please see detail about wiring and description at chapter IL-NT BIO8 Hybrid binary input/output module.
IGS-PTM
Voltage supply 8-36V DC Consumption 0,1A depend on supply voltage Mechanical dimensions: 40 x 95 x 45 mm , DIN rail (35 mm) mounted Interface to controller CAN Binary inputs and outputs see IG-IOM Analog output see IG-IOM
Analog inputs
Not electrically separated Number of inputs 4 Resolution 10 bits
Maximal resistance range 0 – 250 Maximal voltage range 0 – 100 mV Maximal current range 0 – 20 mA
Resistance measurement tolerance 1 % 2 out of measured value
Voltage measurement tolerance 1,5 % 1mV out of measured value
Current measurement tolerance 2,5 % 0,5mA out of measured value
IGL-RA15
Power supply
Voltage supply 8-36V DC Consumption 0,35-0,1A (+1A max horn output)
Depend on supply voltage
Operating conditions
Operating temperature -20..+70oC
Storage temperature -40..+80oC
InteliLiteNT
– MRS10/11/15/16, SW version 2.0, ©ComAp – June 2012 125 IL-NT-MRS-2.0-Reference Guide.pdf
Protection front panel IP65
Dimensions and weight
Dimensions 180x120x55mm Weight 950g
Horn output
Maximum current 1 A Maximum switching voltage 36 VDC
IG-IB
Voltage supply 8-36V DC Consumption 0,1A depend on supply voltage Mechanical dimensions: 95 x 96 x 43 mm , DIN rail (35 mm) mounted Interface to controller RS232 Interface to modem RS232 Interface to Ethernet RJ45 (10baseT) Operating temperature -30..+70
oC
Storage temperature -30..+70oC
Немного личного опыта
Если есть возможность, изначально почистить все контакты ЦП, ОЗУ, Видеокарты спиртом. Осмотреть сокет на предмет поврежденных ножек. Бывают ситуации когда все запускается без проблем, но в процессе эксплуатации то проблема с памятью, то с видеокартой, соответственно уходим в синий экран и.т.д. Это как правило как раз и есть грязные контакты на процессоре.
Стоит учитывать, что процессоры LGA 2011 Б/У и их хранение и упаковка далеко не заводского формата. Бывает чистишь контакты спиртом, а на тампоне в результате черная грязь образуется.
FF — Это очень обширная ситуация. Дело не доходит даже до инициализации BIOS. Его просто нет:) Бывает так что слетает сама микропрограмма (очень актуальная для плат X79T v1.03) Решение: прошивка с помощью программатора CH341A. Циклически запускается FF и отключается и так пока не отключить питание. Залита неудачная прошивка в плату. Решение: также прошивка программатором CH341A.
Что касается ошибки 73, то в таблице указано возможное решение, при условии если система вообще ни в какую не хочет стартовать. Если ее словили с системой под анлоком, после сна или в процессе работы компьютера, то как правило, на работоспособность ПК это никак не влияет. Например, после полного запуска системы отбил пост код АА, а потом через определенное время заметили уже 73. При этом вся система работает в штатном режиме.
Post-Код | Расшифровка |
---|---|
HUANANZHI | |
00 CF CO D0 F1 FF | Ошибка процессора или Биоса |
01 62 64 69 6F A7 B0 B4 B7 B9 BA C1 C6 D3 D4 D8 E1 | Ошибка оперативной памяти |
0A 0D 0B 24 25 26 2A 2B 31 A6 AE B2 D6 | Ошибка видеокарты |
C1-C6-01-02-19 19 | Ошибка проверки биоса |
A6 AB AE | Ошибка жесткого диска или видеокарты. AE также появится, если система не установлена или работает неправильно. |
04 05 | Неправильный контакт |
BF | Слишком высокая частота оперативной памяти |
B1 | Несовместимая оперативная память |
9C | Ошибка оперативной памяти или процессора |
67 | Ошибка оперативной памяти |
9A | Ошибка процессора |
53 | Оперативная память не установлена |
96 | Материнская плата X99 с E5-16xx v3 в разгоне |
73 | Отключаем в BIOS «Fast Boot» |
Звуковые сигналы | |
1 короткий | Ошибка оперативной памяти |
5 коротких, 2 коротких+5 коротких | Ошибка видеокарты |
Продолжительный длинный | Ошибка процессора или диода материнской платы |
1 короткий + 10 коротких | Ошибка CMOS или материнской платы |
Post-Код | Расшифровка |
---|---|
KLLISRE | |
FF 01 C0 D0 CF F1 E1 | Ошибка процессора |
C1 C6 C3 E1 D3 D4 D6 D8 B0 A7 E1 AE 6F 69 01 B7 B9 | Ошибка оперативной памяти |
01 0A 0B 0D 24 25 26 2A 2B 31 AE A6 D6 64 62 B2 | Ошибка видеокарты |
C1-C6-C3-01-02-19 | Ошибка проверки биоса |
AA 40 4E 55 | Не имеют значения |